JP2022179652A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can improve the amusement of a game.

SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on an operation of a start lever 41 after a bet operation is carried out. The corresponding reel is then stopped by an operation of stop switches 42-44, and a stop symbol according to a lottery result is stopped to generate put-out of medals. When winning a transition to a CZ mode, etc. in a three-bet game, a continuous performance is set to be executed over a plurality of games. When a second BB winning in a two-bet game is satisfied in the execution of the continuous performance, and a transition to a bonus game in a second BB state is carried out, the continuous performance is cancelled or suspended.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a configuration is known in which a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery (for example, Patent Document 1 reference).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of variable display areas in which a pattern is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied;
When a specific trigger is established, the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas and the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas. a specific effect setting means for setting the effect to be executed;
a specific effect executing means for causing the specific effect to be executed by a predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means;
In a game machine equipped with
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing a first game corresponding to the establishment of the first condition when the first condition is satisfied, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second game is executed. The configuration is capable of executing a second game corresponding to the establishment of a condition,
The specific effect setting means comprises a first means for setting the specific effect to be executed when the specific opportunity is established in a situation where the game of the first condition is played,
The second condition is satisfied after the specific effect is set by the first means, and the second game corresponding to the establishment of the second condition is executed during execution of the specific effect set by the first means. In the event that the specific performance is being executed, the second means is provided for canceling or interrupting the specific effect being executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of precursor mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number update processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first game number management process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second number-of-games management process; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a third game number management process; It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation table for this omen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario data table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a special combination notification process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-predictive effect table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a continuous effect waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuous production|presentation execution. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of continuous production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of continuous production. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a scenario data table according to a second embodiment, (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuous production|presentation execution. It is a flowchart which shows the process for preliminary|backup production|presentations. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of continuous production. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a scenario data table according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects during a bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuous production|presentation execution. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of continuous production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of continuous production. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a bonus effect setting process according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario data table; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing a continuous effect execution process, (b) is a flow chart showing a full stop time effect setting process, and (c) is a flow chart showing a continuous effect setting process. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of continuous production. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing a continuous effect setting process, and (b) is a flow chart showing a full stop time effect setting process. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of continuous production. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing an ending effect setting process, and (b) is a flow chart showing an ending effect execution process. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the ending production. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games until reaching the upper limit number of increases in the advantageous interval and the number of remaining games until reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval in the seventh embodiment; . 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the ending effect.

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an active line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals betted, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal bet. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for the role. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned makes it possible for the player to distinguish between the first minor winning combination and the second minor winning combination. It is also possible to understand that different small role winnings are established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor winning combination is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbols stop together on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the lines on which the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be recognized. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 9th minor winning prize to the 32nd minor winning prize should all stop with the “Bell” symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege given according to the game results. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. Winning will be established. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the symbols "BAR" are aligned and stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b). As shown, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5. When the second replay win is established, the game state does not shift, but the game shifts to an information mode advantageous to the player, and the first AT state is started.

In the third replay, the effective line ML is the “Bell” symbol, the “Ark shell” symbol or the “Senior” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “Bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “Bell” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when it stops at the top. When the symbols corresponding to the third replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the symbols "WHITE 7" are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG. 14(d). As shown in the figure, the "red 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right downward line L4. When the third replay win is established, the game state does not shift, but the game state shifts to an information mode advantageous to the player, and the second AT state is started.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called "watermelon tenpai" is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the middle line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbols corresponding to the 10th re-game win or 12th re-game win stop on the activated line ML, a "Cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB win is won. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, the white 7 symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

When the ``white 7'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white shell'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``BAR'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB win is won. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning is stopped on the activated line ML, the "WHITE 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The "red 7" pattern stops in the middle row.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operates, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number of games is set to three and the specific number is set to three, three virtual medals are awarded on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the prescribed number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two virtual medals are awarded on the condition that there are credits. is input. In addition, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the prescribed number is set as 3 or 2 and the specific number is set as 3, 3 virtual medals are issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the specified number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 2, 2 credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. Throwing of virtual medals is performed.

A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals.

The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether or not the read result is normal. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay wins have been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process. When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211, and the medal payout process of step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, since the prescribed numbers of bets are set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state includes the lottery table for the 3-bet game, A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the game state flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is displayed. to select. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags are set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state. Select a lottery table. When the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 21).

In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step S306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see step S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and a combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value about 18.4 times, respectively. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in 3-bet games, before winning the 1st BB, you can expect a decrease of about 1.50 medals per game (net increase minus about 1.50), excluding the increase in the 1st BB state. In the carryover state after winning the 1st BB, excluding the increase in the 1st BB state, a decrease of about 2.10 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 2.10 medals).

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in a 2-bet game, before winning the 2nd BB, you can expect a decrease of about 0.24 medals per game (net increase minus about 0.24), excluding the increase in the 2nd BB. In the carry-over state after winning, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB state (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in step S306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. In addition, when the watermelon is won (winning when IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning winning combination are displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB win flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even when the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, setting of the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning will be performed. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, and the 1BB prize, the 7th minor combination and the 1st When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established preferentially over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, the process for updating the number of games is executed in step S314. In the game number update process, the number of remaining games in the portent mode, CZ mode, and AT mode is updated. The number-of-games update process will be described later in detail.

In subsequent step S315, the first section display process is executed, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b.

After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won at the push order bell (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when operated in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established when the player wins. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop.

In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, a minor winning combination may be established, or none of the minor winning combinations may be established and may be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, a winning result handling process is executed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , to end the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step S414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on whether there is a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. Playing 2-bet games is allowed. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step S506, a process of inputting "46" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "46" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out.

In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501.

In the subsequent step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of the game, and is the number of bets that allows the reels 32L to 32R to start rotating by operating the start lever 41 (in other words, the game can be started). number of possible bets). That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated. In this case, it is possible to play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the 1st BB prize has not been established means that the 2nd BB prize has been established. In this case, the process advances to step S511 to execute the process of inputting "46" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 46 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed.

The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. That is, the specified number of coins is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

In the present embodiment, the BB counter (maximum payout number) is set to the same value when the 1st BB win is established and when the 2nd BB win is established, but these values may be different. For example, the value of the BB counter set when the first BB win is established may be made larger than that when the second BB win is established, or vice versa.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/9.02, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.78. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/3.13. In this case, a decrease of about 0.96 medals per game is expected (net increase minus about 0.96 medals). In other words, in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, the total difference in the number of medals for the period from the start to the end of each BB state (the total number of medals paid out in the BB state minus the total number of medals inserted in the BB state ) becomes a negative value, and the number of medals held decreases.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/9.03, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state.

In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/9.03, and even in the 2-bet game, the second BB state is more likely to win than the normal game state. is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1BB state and the 2nd BB state, since a lottery table is used in which the number of medals can be decreased in each game, even if the 1BB state or the 2BB state is completed, the number of medals held will not increase. Conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will be reduced by completing the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process using the lottery table for the BB state and control of each reel. If no winning has been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step S516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516.

If it is determined in step S517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step S518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

After that, in step S521, after setting the prescribed bet numbers to 2 and 3, this bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state, it is possible to play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game. However, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted, and the game is a 2-bet game. will take place. In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to facilitate the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are finished, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. Three medals must be inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 in order to play the betting game.

Here, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game in the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

In the initial state where the RAM 106 is initialized (cleared), the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set, and there is a normal game state (non-internal state) in which neither BB is won. It's becoming In this case, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 or 3, and it is possible to play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a two bet game.

In the non-internal state, the 1st BB can be won in the 3-bet game, but the 2nd BB is not won. On the other hand, in a 2-bet game, on the contrary, although the second BB can be won, the first BB is not won. Therefore, in a situation where the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a non-internal state (a state in which 2 is input to the MAX bet counter) and a 2-bet game is played, the winning of the 2nd BB may occur. Become.

If the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the carryover state (internal state) in which the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over is entered. Also in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and it is possible to play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another combination when the combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for increasing medals. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase and decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won by pushing order. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 25) of winning the 1st to 6th small wins when the bell is won in the pressing order. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navi mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game in which the 1st credit input switch 56 is operated is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state in which the 2nd BB prize won cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB win is carried over, neither the 1st BB win nor the 2nd BB win occurs. The game is continued in this state.

In the slot machine 10, the 1st BB winning flag is stored in the normal area of the various flags storage area 106d, while the 2nd BB winning flag is stored in the storage area of the various flags storage area 106d. It is configured to be The normal area is an area in which various general flags such as winning flags for other winning combinations are stored. Each flag stored in the normal area is stored and held by backup power or the like even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (even if the power is turned off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the game hall is closed, if the power is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 is started while various flags stored in the normal area are stored, and the first BB is won. Even if the power is turned ON/OFF with the flag set, the slot machine 10 is started with the first BB winning flag set. However, when the winning probability setting process is started when the slot machine 10 is started up (when the setting is changed), the initialization process (clearing process) of the normal area is performed. Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the first BB winning flag is cleared together with other flags stored in the normal area.

On the other hand, the storage area is an area in which only the second BB winning flag is stored. Similar to the normal area described above, the flags stored in the storage area are not cleared when the power is turned on/off. Furthermore, in the storage area, even if the winning probability setting process is started when the slot machine 10 is started up, the initialization process of the storage area is not performed (it is excluded from the initialization process). ). Therefore, even if the winning probability setting process is performed, the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area is held (stored) without being cleared. In other words, when the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the first BB winning flag in which the first BB winning flag is stored, the first BB winning flag is cleared and started as a non-internal state. When the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the second BB winning in which the second BB winning flag is stored, the second BB winning flag is not cleared and the game is started in the internal state of the second BB winning. be. By doing so, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over can be continued not only when the slot machine 10 is turned ON/OFF, but also when the setting is changed.

Then, in order to play the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over, basically, the game should be played until the winning of the second BB in the 2-bet game when the slot machine 10 is shipped from the factory. , the second BB winning is stored and held until the reset switch 72 is operated and the RAM clearing process is performed. By doing so, it is possible to favorably carry out the game in a state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the 2nd BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) when the push order bell is won. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in step S601, a process of grasping the current game state is performed. More specifically, either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, or the non-internal state (normal game state) before the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, or the internal state after the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won. (carried over state) or not. In the 1BB state and the 2BB state, 3 is set as the prescribed bet number. 2 and 3 are set.

In the subsequent step S602, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is one prescribed number (specific prescribed number) prescribed in the state ascertained in step S601. In this embodiment, the specific specified number of the first BB state and the second BB state is 3. In this case, the specified number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is 3. If it is determined to be in the 1BB state or the second BB state, an affirmative determination is always made in step S602. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in states other than the first BB state and the second BB state, 3 out of the specified numbers 2 and 3 are set as the specific specified number, and the first BB state and the second BB state If the number of bets is 3 in any other state, affirmative determination is made in step S602. In this case, processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S603 is performed. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 2 in a state other than the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

In other words, in the present embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S603 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, the internal state can be played in the 3-bet game, and the normal game in which the second BB is carried over can be facilitated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S604, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 30, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game.

As shown in FIG. 30, as a trigger for the lottery to move to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous section transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether or not an AT mode winning flag or an AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning a lottery for shifting to the AT mode, and the AT mode flag is a flag that is set when shifting to the AT mode. That is, in step S605, it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has already been confirmed or has been completed. If none of the flags have been set in step S605 and the transition to the AT mode has not yet been determined, an AT lottery process is executed in step S606. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S605, AT addition processing is executed in step S607.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the AT lottery process, first, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. In the subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the CZ mode is in progress, is set (stored) at the start of the CZ mode, and is cleared at the end of the CZ mode. In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ (chance zone) mode are provided as states before winning the lottery for transition to AT mode in an advantageous section, and CZ mode shifts to AT mode rather than normal mode. It is set as a mode that makes it easy to win the transition lottery.

If it is determined in step S802 that the CZ mode flag is not stored, that is, if the mode is normal mode, a normal AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 in step S803. In the normal AT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the AT mode transition rate (AT mode transition lottery winning probability) is set according to the lottery result of each game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S802 that the CZ mode flag is stored, that is, if the CZ mode is set, in step S804, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode is retrieved from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. get. Also in the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode, as shown in FIG. 30, the transition rate to AT mode is set according to the lottery result of each game.

In the present embodiment, in both the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ mode AT mode transition lottery table, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, and chance item A are used as triggers for the AT mode shift lottery. , chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, pushing order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the games in the normal mode and the CZ mode as 3-bet games carrying over the second BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the AT mode shift lottery. However, in the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, the AT mode transition rate when winning chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, watermelon is normal AT mode It is higher than in the case of the transition lottery table, and the transition rate to AT mode is given preferential treatment.

Note that the AT mode transition lottery trigger is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which only some results that can be won in games in the normal mode and the CZ mode as a game serve as triggers.

After execution of step S803 or step S804, it progresses to step S805 and performs AT mode lottery processing. In the AT mode lottery process, a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is obtained, and the AT mode transition lottery table obtained in step S803 or step S804 is used to obtain the random number obtained, the lottery result grasped in step S801, and the AT mode transition lottery table obtained in step S803 or step S804. Mode lottery will be held. In the following step S806, it is determined whether or not the AT mode lottery process in step S805 has won the AT mode transition. If the game has been won, the AT mode winning process of steps S807 to S810 is executed, and if the game has not been won, the AT mode non-winning process of steps S811 to S822 is executed.

Here, the AT mode is a mode in which a push order notification corresponding to the first to sixth minor wins is generated when the push order bell is won, and is a mode in which a large increase in medals can be expected. When the AT mode is shifted to the pressing order notification, it is possible to achieve the first to sixth minor winning prizes when each pressing order bell wins. In the present embodiment, the net increase in the number of cards per game during the AT mode is approximately plus 8.04 cards. In the AT mode, the number of initial games is set to 50, and by winning an additional lottery, the number of remaining games is added. Also, the winning probability of the additional lottery is set higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode. When the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, the AT mode ends.

If it is determined in step S806 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, that is, whether or not the CZ mode is in progress. judge. If the CZ mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S808 to execute precursor mode setting processing. Omen mode is a mode that makes it easier to generate a winning suggestion effect that suggests that you have won in addition to the number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, and AT mode. You will be notified that you have won. That is, when the number of precursory games is set and the mode is switched to the precursory mode, notification of winning the additional number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, or AT mode waits until the set number of games is completed. It is designed to be Also, although the details will be described later, the transition to CZ mode or AT mode, and the implementation of adding the number of games in AT mode are not performed immediately after winning the CZ mode transition lottery, etc., but the end of the omen mode. wait to be done. In other words, transition to the CZ mode and the like are also put on standby by the precursor mode. In this sense, the period from the transition to the portent mode to the end thereof can be referred to as a waiting period during which the announcement of winning, the transition to the CZ mode, and the like are on standby.

In the portent mode setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31, first, in step S901, a portent game number table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 32, in the predictive game number table according to the present embodiment, 5 to 32 games are set as the selectable predictive game number (continuous game number of the predictive mode), and the current game mode (normal mode or AT mode), the selection probability for each number of games is set differently.

Specifically, if you win the CZ mode transition lottery during normal mode, 5 games will be selected with a probability of 10%, 6 to 10 games will be selected with a probability of 30%, and 11 games will be selected with a probability of 60%. ~20 games are set to be selected. Also, if you win the AT mode transition lottery during normal mode, 6 to 10 games will be selected with a probability of 10%, 11 to 20 games will be selected with a 30% probability, and 21 to 20 games will be selected with a 60% probability. 32 games are set to be selected. In addition, if the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is won during the AT mode, 5 games are selected with a probability of 100%. It should be noted that each of the number of precursor games is merely an example, and the length of the number of precursor games and the selection probability can be arbitrarily set.

After the number of precursor games table is obtained in step S901, lottery processing for the number of precursor games is executed in step S902. In the precursor mode number lottery process, the number of precursor games for the current precursor mode is drawn based on the obtained precursor game number table and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . In the subsequent step S903, a process of setting (inputting) the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for ascertaining the number of remaining games in the portent mode, and is decremented by one for each game.

In step S904, the precursor mode flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The portent mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the portent mode is on, is set when the portent mode starts, and is cleared when the portent mode ends. After step S904 is executed, in step S905, an omen start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this omen mode setting process ends. The portent start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the mode has been shifted to the portent mode. The portent start command includes information indicating the transition to the portent mode and information indicating the value of the portent counter (the number of portent games) set in step S903. Therefore, by receiving the precursor start command, the display control device 81 can know not only that the precursor mode has been entered, but also the number of precursor games at that time. It is possible to grasp after how many games the notification of winning should be made.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process (FIG. 29), after execution of step S808 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S807 (when in CZ mode), the process proceeds to step S809, and AT Set (store) the mode winning flag. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode has been won.

It should be noted that, when in the CZ mode, the process of setting the precursor mode in step S808 is not executed, and the transition to the precursor mode and the number of precursor games are not set, but the transition to the AT mode is won during the CZ mode. In this case, it is configured to notify the winner when the CZ mode ends. In other words, if the player wins to switch to the AT mode while in the CZ mode, the notification of the win to switch to the AT mode waits until the number of CZ games set as the number of games to be played in the CZ mode is completed. It is designed to be In addition, although the details will be described later, the transition to the AT mode in the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode is not performed immediately after winning the transition lottery, but the end of the CZ mode is performed. wait to be done. That is, the transition to the AT mode is also put on standby by the CZ mode. In this sense, the duration (execution period) of the CZ mode can be said to be a waiting period for notification of winning and transition to the AT mode.

After step S809 is executed, an AT winning command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S810, and then this AT lottery process is terminated. The AT winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won.

If a negative determination is made in step S806 (if it is determined that the AT mode has not been won), the process proceeds to step S811 to determine whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. If the CZ mode flag is not stored, that is, if the normal mode is in progress, the CZ mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 in step S812. In the CZ mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, a transition rate to the CZ mode (probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. In the present embodiment, as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell , Push order bell, Watermelon is set. That is, in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all winning results are set as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery.

The trigger for the CZ mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the AT mode transition lottery is executed only when part of the chances are won. It may be configured such that only part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode as a game is a trigger role.

After acquiring the CZ mode transition lottery table in step S812, a CZ mode transition lottery is executed in step S813. In the CZ mode transition lottery, a CZ mode lottery is performed based on the above-obtained CZ mode transition lottery table and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. In the subsequent step S814, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode lottery process in step S813 has won the transition to the CZ mode.

If it is determined in step S814 that the CZ mode shift lottery has been won, the process advances to step S815 to execute a sign mode setting process. This processing is the same as the setting processing of the portent mode in step S808, and according to the flow chart of FIG. .

After step S815 is executed, the CZ mode winning flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S816. The CZ mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode has been won. In the subsequent step S817, a CZ winning command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this AT lottery process ends. The CZ winning command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 of winning the CZ mode transition lottery.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S811 (if the CZ mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S818 to acquire a lottery table for adding the number of games for CZ mode from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. FIG. In the CZ mode game number addition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 30, the winning probability of the CZ mode game number addition lottery is set according to the lottery result of each game. In the present embodiment, as triggers for the additional lottery, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push A forward bell and a watermelon are set. That is, in the game in the normal mode as a 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB is carried over, all winning results are set as triggers for the extra lottery.

It should be noted that the opportunity to add the number of games in CZ mode is not limited to the above, for example, the AT mode transition lottery is executed only when a part of the chances are won, and the second BB is carried over. It may be configured such that only part of the results that can be won in the game in the normal mode as the 3-bet game is the trigger.

After the CZ mode game number addition lottery table is acquired in step S818, the CZ mode game number addition lottery is executed in step S819. In the addition lottery, a lottery for adding the number of CZ mode games is performed based on the acquired CZ mode game number addition lottery table and lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . In the following step S820, it is determined whether or not the addition lottery in step S819 has won the addition of the number of games in the CZ mode.

If it is determined that the number of games added has not been won, this AT lottery process is terminated as it is. A predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 10) is added to the received CZ counter. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode. topped up). It should be noted that the number of games to be added in the CZ mode does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games.

In the following step S822, a CZ addition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this AT lottery process is terminated. The CZ add-on command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 of winning the CZ mode game add-on. The CZ add-on command includes information indicating the number of add-on games as well as information indicating that the player has won the add-on game count. Therefore, by receiving the CZ add-on command, the display control device 81 can grasp the winning of the game number add-on lottery, the number of add-on games, and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT add-on process is a process that is executed when the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous AT mode games.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S1001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. In the subsequent step S1002, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM . When the AT mode winning flag is stored, that is, when the AT mode is in the winning state, the process proceeds to step S1003, and the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is stored in the flag storage area 106d. determine whether or not there is In the present embodiment, as the AT mode, a first AT mode and a second AT mode are set that differ in performance (probability of winning an additional lottery) in the AT mode. It is configured to shift when the symbol combination (shifting result) is stopped and displayed. The notification flag for the 1st AT is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the pushing order notification for stopping and displaying the transition result for the 1st AT should be executed, and the notification flag for the 2nd AT is a flag for the 2nd AT. This is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the pressing order notification for stopping and displaying the transition result for 1 is to be executed. The first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set when the precursor mode ends, and is cleared when the first AT mode or the second AT mode is entered.

If a negative determination is made in step S1003, that is, if the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d, but neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is stored, It means that it is in the omen mode after winning the AT mode. In this case, the process advances to step S1004 to execute a process of acquiring the additional lottery table before notification of winning after winning from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, that is, if the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d and either the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is stored. , means that although the precursor mode when winning the AT mode has ended, the transition to the first AT mode or the second AT mode has not yet been performed. In this case, the process advances to step S1005 to execute a process of acquiring an additional lottery table before transition after notification of winning from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 34, when comparing the additional lottery table before notification of winning after winning and the table for adding lottery before transition after notification of winning, the additional lottery using the table before transition after notification of winning is more likely to be won after winning. It is set so that it is easier to win the addition lottery than the addition lottery using the pre-notification addition lottery table. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by the second chance B, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before notification of winning after winning has a probability of 5%, whereas the additional lottery before transition after notification of winning is won. In the additional lottery using the table, the winning probability is 7%, and in the situation before shifting to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery after the notification of winning than before the notification of winning the AT mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002 (if the AT mode winning flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S1006 to determine whether or not the first AT flag is stored in the flag storage area 106d. The first AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the first AT mode. Here, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the first AT mode, the AT mode winning flag, the first AT notification flag, and the second AT notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 106d are cleared, It is configured to store the 1AT flag. Therefore, a negative determination in step S1002 means that the mode is shifted to either the first AT mode or the second AT mode.

If it is determined in step S1006 that the 1st AT flag is stored (if the 1st AT mode is in progress), in step S1007 the additional lottery table for the 1st AT is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1007 that the first AT flag is not stored, it means that the second AT mode is in progress. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1008 to acquire the second AT additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 34, comparing the 1st AT extra lottery table and the 2nd AT extra lottery table, the extra lottery using the 2nd AT extra lottery table uses the 1st AT extra lottery table. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by Cherry B, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the 1st AT wins with a probability of 10%, whereas the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the 2nd AT. In the lottery, the probability of winning is 20%, and in the situation after shifting to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery during the second AT mode than during the first AT mode.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in any one of steps S1004, S1005, S1007 and S1008, an additional lottery is executed in step S1009. Then, in step S1010, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when winning the addition lottery, the AT addition winning flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S1011. The AT add-on win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the win has been made on top of the number of continuous games in the AT mode. In the following step S1012, the precursor mode setting process is executed, and then the AT addition process is terminated. The process of step S1012 is the same as the precursor mode setting process of step S808 of FIG. 29, and according to the flowchart of FIG. set.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27), after the process of step S606 or step S607 is executed, it is determined in step S608 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a win. The push order is the result including the push order bell, normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C. Normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C are all the results of winning multiple replays. is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, the normal replay A basically sets the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M; 32R stop control is performed. On the other hand, the normal Lip B and the normal Lip C are arranged so that when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M from each reel 32L, 32M, 32M 32R is controlled to stop, and when the left stop switch 42 or middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop so that the first regame win is established. .

However, in these normal replays A, normal replays B, and normal replays C, even if any of the replay winning replays that are duplicately won are established, the benefits granted are replays, and replays that are established Only the type of game is different. In other words, the normal replay A, normal replay B, and normal replay C are game results in which replay winnings are established regardless of the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop numbers differ depending on the operating order.

In particular, the normal reply B and the normal reply C are the triggers for the start of the AT mode, and after the AT mode winning flag is set, the notification to the effect that the transition to the AT mode may occur was performed. After that, after the first AT mode is started in a game in which the second replay winning prize can be established, and after the AT mode win flag is set, a notification is made to the effect that a transition to the AT mode may occur. , the second AT mode is started in a game in which the third replay winning can be established. That is, even if the AT mode winning flag is set, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the above notification (AT winning notification effect) is executed, and even after the above notification is executed. However, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the game becomes a game in which the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize can be established.

If it is determined in step S608 that the first hand has been won, it is determined in step S609 whether or not any of the CZ mode flag, AT mode winning flag, or AT mode flag is set. If any one of these flags is set, the pressing order notification process is executed in step S610, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S608 or step S609, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification process executed in step S610, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 36(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to obtain a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is established when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which the transition to the advantageous section can occur and the pushing order informing is possible is established. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which it is easy for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the pushing order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, of the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

Explaining the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Processing for notification of pressing order>
Next, the pressing order notification process executed in step S610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag has not been set, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the AT mode winning flag has been set. The case where the CZ mode flag is not set and the AT mode winning flag is set means that the AT mode has not yet been switched to the AT mode after winning the AT mode. In this case, in step S1103, it is determined whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the AT mode winning flag is set but the AT notification flag is not set, it means that although the AT mode shift lottery has been won, the prediction mode is still on. In this case, in the current game, no push order notification is generated, and the push order notification process is terminated. If the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply B or normal reply C. In the case of the normal reply A or the push order bell instead of the normal reply B and the normal reply C, the main push order informing process is terminated as it is. If it is either normal reply B or normal reply C, it is determined whether or not it is normal reply B in step S1105. If it is normal reply B, it is determined in step S1106 whether or not the first AT notification flag is set. If the second AT notification flag is set instead of the first AT notification flag, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the normal reply B is won and the first AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1107 to execute processing for starting the first AT mode.

That is, in step S1107, the first AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1108, the first AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the first AT mode will start from the current game. After that, in step S1009, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the second regame winning is performed. Then, in step S1110, after executing the process of setting the push order command including the information of the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning as the object to be output to the display control device 81, the main push order notification process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order command displays, as the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the second replay winning, a pressing order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, or "Aim from the right! !”, voice navigation, etc. are performed, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning are notified.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the normal reply is not the normal reply B but the normal reply C, the process proceeds to step S1111. In step S1111, it is determined whether or not the second AT notification flag is set. If the first AT notification flag is set instead of the second AT notification flag, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the normal reply C is won and the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1112 to execute processing for starting the second AT mode.

That is, in step S1112, the second AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1113, a second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the second AT mode will start from the current game. After that, in step S1114, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the third regame winning is performed. Then, in step S1115, after executing the process of setting the push order command including the information of the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning as an output object to the display control device 81, the main push order notification process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order command displays, as the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the third replay winning, a pressing order notification effect of the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, or "Aim from the right! !”, voice navigation, etc. are performed, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third re-game are announced.

If it is determined in step S1101 that the CZ mode flag has been set, or if the AT mode winning flag has not been set in step S1102 and the AT mode is already in progress, the process advances to step S1116. In step S1116, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the push order bell. If it is not the push order bell, the push order informing process is terminated. If it is the push order bell, it is determined in step S1117 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step S1118 whether or not the notified flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The notified flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the notification of the pressing order when winning the pressing order bell has already been performed in the CZ mode, and is used when the CZ mode ends (including when shifting to the AT mode). ) are cleared. If the notification completion flag is set, the pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the notified flag is not set, a process of setting the notified flag is executed in step S1119.

If the AT mode flag instead of the CZ mode flag is set at step S1117, or after the processing of step S1119 is executed, at step S1120, according to the type of the bell in the current pressing order, the first minor winning prize is won. to control the instruction monitor 68 so as to notify the pressing order corresponding to the winning of the 6th minor combination. Then, in step S1121, after executing a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an object to be output to the display control device 81, The actual pressing order notification processing is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the pressing order command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed.

<Processing for updating the number of games>
Next, the process for updating the number of games in step S314 in the lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the number-of-games update process, a process of updating the number of remaining games in the precursor mode, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is executed.

In the game number update process, first, in step S1201, a process of grasping the current game state is performed. Specifically, the current gaming state is the internal state after winning the 1st BB, the internal state after winning the 2nd BB, the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB, the non-internal state before winning the 2nd BB, the 1st BB state, or the 2nd BB. Know which state you are in.

In the following step S1202, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game corresponds to the current gaming state, that is, whether or not it matches the number of bets set as a specific prescribed number for the current gaming state. determine whether As already explained, in the present embodiment, the specific specified number is set to 3 in any of the above states. judge. For example, if the game is started with the number of bets of 3 in the internal state after winning the 2nd BB, this step is determined affirmatively, and if the game is started with the number of bets of 2, this step is determined negatively. . If a negative determination is made in step S1202, this process for updating the number of games ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1202 is affirmative, that is, if the current game is started with the number of bets of the specific specified number (3), the process proceeds to step S1203, and the first BB state flag is stored in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. Alternatively, it determines whether or not the second BB state flag is stored. When either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored (when the player is in the BB state), the game number updating process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (if not in the BB state), the flow advances to step S1204 to determine whether or not the portent mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. judge. The precursor mode flag is a flag indicating that the precursor mode is on, as already explained.

If the precursor mode flag is stored (if the precursor mode is in progress), processing for subtracting 1 from the value of the precursor counter is executed in step S1205. As a result, the number of remaining games in the omen mode is updated. Note that the number-of-games update process is executed at the start of the game, so in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated when the game is started.

After step S1205 is executed, a precursor game count update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1206. The portent game number update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of remaining games in the portent mode has been updated. The display control device 81 receives the predictive game number update command, so that it becomes possible to grasp that the number of remaining games in the predictive mode has been updated by the main control device 101 .

After execution of step S1206 or when a negative determination is made in step S1204 (when the precursor mode is not in progress), it is determined in step S1207 whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. The CZ mode flag is a flag indicating that the CZ mode is on, as already explained.

If the CZ mode flag is stored (if the CZ mode is in progress), a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the CZ counter is executed in step S1208. Thereby, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is updated. In the subsequent step S1209, a CZ game count update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. FIG. The CZ game number update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode has been updated.

After execution of step S1209 or when a negative determination is made in step S1207 (when the CZ mode is not in progress), it is determined in step S1210 whether or not an AT mode flag is stored in the flag storage area 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag indicating that the AT mode is on, as already explained.

If the AT mode flag is stored (if the AT mode is in progress), a process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter value is executed in step S1211. As a result, the number of remaining AT mode games is updated. In the subsequent step S1212, an AT game number update command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. FIG. The AT game count update command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the AT mode remaining game count has been updated. After the end of step S1212 or when a negative determination is made in step S1210 (when the AT mode is not in progress), this process for updating the number of games is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a negative determination is made in step S1202 (when the number of bets does not match the specific prescribed number corresponding to the current gaming state (when the game is started with the number of bets set to 2)), step The processing from S1203 to step S1212 is skipped, and the number of remaining games in the portent mode and CZ mode is not updated. The duration of Omen Mode and CZ Mode functions as a waiting period to wait for winning announcements, etc., but if the number of remaining games in each mode is not updated, the end game of each mode will be postponed accordingly. Become. That is, the waiting period is extended.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the CZ mode, AT mode, or the like is performed according to the game result of the game. This processing is executed when it is determined that all the reels 32L to 32R are stopped (when the game is over).

First, in step S1301, a process for grasping the current gaming state is performed, and in step S1302, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the current game is a specific prescribed number defined in the state grasped in step S1301. make a judgment as to whether These processes are similar to steps S601 and S602 in FIG. 27 and steps S1201 and S1202 in FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S1302, that is, if the number of bets does not match the specific prescribed number corresponding to the current gaming state (when the game is played with the number of bets set to 2), the processing from step S1303 onwards is performed. Instead, the process for dealing with winning results is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1302 is affirmative, that is, if the number of bets matches the specific prescribed number corresponding to the current gaming state (when the game is played with the number of bets set to 3), the process proceeds to step S1303. 1 game number management processing is executed. In the first number-of-games management process, the omen mode is ended, and a process for notifying a winner when a player wins to switch to the AT mode during the normal mode is executed.

In the first game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. . If neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (if not in the BB state), the process advances to step S1402 to determine whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the flag storage area 106d. do. If the CZ mode flag is not stored (if the CZ mode is not in progress), the process advances to step S1403 to determine whether or not the portent mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d.

If the precursor mode flag is stored (if the precursor mode is in progress), the process advances to step S1404 to determine whether the value of the precursor counter provided in the counter area 106e of the RAM 106 is 0 or not. If the value of the portent counter is not 0, that is, if the number of remaining games in the portent mode is 1 or more, the first game number management process is terminated to continue the portent mode.

On the other hand, if the value of the portent counter is 0 (if the number of remaining games in the portent mode is 0), the flow advances to step S1405 to clear (delete) the portent mode flags stored in the flag storage area 106d. do. This ends the portent mode. In the subsequent step S1406, a precursor end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. FIG. The portent end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the portent mode has ended.

After execution of step S1406, it is determined in step S1407 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode win flag is set when a win is made to switch to the AT mode.

If the AT mode winning flag is stored, it means that the precursor mode executed with the AT mode winning in the normal mode as a trigger has ended. AT type determination processing is performed to determine whether the type is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. In the present embodiment, as already described, a plurality of types of AT modes are set, including the first AT mode and the second AT mode in which additional performance is given more preferential treatment than the first AT mode, and in the AT type determination process, For example, the current AT mode type is determined by lottery according to the setting value, the previous AT mode type, the number of medals increased during the advantageous interval, the number of games during the advantageous interval, or the like, or randomly.

In step S1409, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode has been determined based on the processing result of step S1408. In the case of the first AT mode, in step S1410, the notification flag for the first AT is set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 106d, and then in step S1411, the first AT winning notification command is output as an output target to the display control device 81. set. By setting the notification flag for the first AT, the process for generating the notification of the pressing order for the second re-game winning is performed in the pressing order notification process (FIG. 38). The 1st AT winning notification command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the transition to the 1st AT mode has been won and that the winning should be notified.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1409 (when the transition to the second AT mode is won), the notification flag for the second AT is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d in step S1412, and then the process proceeds to step S1413. , the second AT win notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . By setting the notification flag for the second AT, the process for generating the pressing order notification for the third re-game winning is performed in the pressing order notification process (FIG. 38). The 2nd AT winning notification command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the transition to the 2nd AT mode has been won and that the winning should be notified.

After execution of step S1411 or step S1413, if affirmative determination is made in step S1401 (BB state), if affirmative determination is made in step S1402 (in CZ mode), or if negative determination is made in step S1403 (precursor mode If not during), the first number-of-games management process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1407 (if the ending omen mode is not triggered by the AT mode winning in the normal mode), the process proceeds to step S1414, and the AT addition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. Determine whether or not The AT add-on flag is set when the game add-on win is won during the AT mode, and this step is triggered by the game add-on win while the sign mode ended in step S1406 is the AT mode. It is to determine whether or not it is a thing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a situation to shift to the omen mode, in addition to the case of winning the transition to the CZ mode during the normal mode, and the case of winning the number of games added during the AT mode, during the normal mode There is a case where the transition to the CZ mode is won, but in this case, while the CZ mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d, neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT addition flag are stored. A negative determination is made in each of steps S1407 and S1414.

If it is determined in step S1414 that the AT addition winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1415 to clear (delete) the AT addition winning flag. In the subsequent step S1416, a number-of-addition-games lottery process is executed. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and the current add-on game number is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 34, the add-on game number table is set so that the add-on game number differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. On the other hand, if Cherry A is used as a trigger, an average of 15 games will be added on average. It is set so that the number of additional games is larger in the case.

After executing the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step S1416, the process of adding the current number of additional games to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1417. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining AT mode games. In the following step S1418, an AT addition command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The AT add-on command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 of winning the AT mode game add-on. The AT add-on command includes information indicating that the lottery for adding the number of games has been won and information indicating the number of add-on games. Therefore, by receiving the AT add-on command, the display control device 81 can grasp the winning of the add-on game number, the number of add-on games, and the remaining number of AT mode games. After execution of step S1418 or when a negative determination is made in step S1414, this first number-of-games management process ends.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process (FIG. 40), after executing the first number-of-games management process in step S1303, the second number-of-games management process is executed in step S1304. In the second number-of-games management process, the start and end of the CZ mode are controlled, and the process of notifying the winner when the player wins to switch to the AT mode during the CZ mode is executed.

In the second game count management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. If neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (if not in the BB state), the process advances to step S1502 to determine whether or not the portent mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. do. If the portent mode flag is not stored (if the portent mode is not in progress), the process advances to step S1503 to determine whether or not the CZ mode win flag is stored in the flag storage area 106d. The CZ mode winning flag is set when the transition to the CZ mode is won.

If it is determined that the CZ mode winning flag is stored, the CZ mode winning flag is cleared (deleted) in step S1504. Next, in step S1505, the CZ mode flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 106d. This initiates the CZ mode (transitions to the CZ mode). In the subsequent step S1505, a process of setting (inputting) a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 games) as an initial value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The CZ counter is a counter for ascertaining the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one for each game. Note that the initial value of the CZ counter (initial number of games in CZ mode) does not necessarily have to be a fixed number of games, and for example, a plurality of types of numbers of games may be selected by lottery for the number of additional games.

After that, in step S1507, a CZ start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The CZ start command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the CZ mode has been entered. The CZ start command includes information indicating the transition to the CZ mode and information indicating the initial number of games in the CZ mode. Therefore, by receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 can grasp the transition to the CZ mode and the number of continuous games in the CZ mode. After execution of step S1507, if affirmative determination is made in step S1501 (BB state) or affirmative determination is made in step S1502 (prediction mode), the second game count management process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503 (if the CZ mode winning flag is not stored), the process advances to step S1508 to determine whether or not the CZ mode flag is stored in the flag storage area 106d. If the CZ mode flag is stored (if the CZ mode is in progress), it is determined in step S1509 whether the value of the CZ counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 0 or not.

When the value of the CZ counter is 0 (when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 0), the process advances to step S1510 to clear (delete) the CZ mode flags stored in the flag storage area 106d. This terminates the CZ mode. In the subsequent step S1511, a CZ end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The CZ end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the CZ mode has ended.

After execution of step S1511, it is determined in step S1512 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d. If the AT mode winning flag is stored, that is, if the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, AT type determination processing is executed in step S1513, and the first AT mode is entered in step S1514. It is determined whether or not the transfer has been won. If the transition to the first AT mode is won, the process advances to step S1515 to set the notification flag for the first AT in the various flag storage area 106d. In subsequent step S 1516 , the first AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 .

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1514 (if a win is made to shift to the second AT mode), the process advances to step S1517 to set the notification flag for the second AT in the various flag storage area 106d. After that, in step S1518, a second AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. FIG.

After execution of step S1516 or step S1518, if a negative decision is made in step S1508 (if not in CZ mode), if a negative decision is made in step S1509 (if the value of the CZ counter is not 0), or if a negative decision is made in step S1512 In the case (when the switch to the AT mode is not won during the CZ mode), the second game number management process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process (FIG. 40), after executing the second number-of-games management process in step S1304, a third number-of-games management process for ending the AT mode is executed in step S1305. Details of the third number-of-games management process will be described later.

After executing the third game count management process in step S1305, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not the first AT start flag is set. As described above, the 1st AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game in which the second replay winning is possible when causing the transition to the 1st AT mode. More specifically, the 1st AT notification flag is This is a flag that is set at the start of a game in which Rep B is normally won in the situation where it is set. That is, the first AT start flag is not set based on the winning result.

If the first AT start flag is set, the first AT start flag is cleared in step S1307, and the first AT flag is set in the flag storage area 106d in step S1308. As already explained, by setting the 1st AT flag, an additional lottery using the 1st AT additional lottery table is performed.

If it is determined in step S1306 that the first AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the second AT start flag is set. As described above, the 2nd AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game in which the third replay winning is possible when causing the transition to the 2nd AT mode. More specifically, the 2nd AT notification flag is This is a flag that is set at the start of the game in which the normal reply C is won in the situation where it is set. That is, the second AT start flag is also not set based on the winning result.

If the second AT start flag is set, the second AT start flag is cleared in step S1310, and the second AT flag is set in the flag storage area 106d in step S1311. If it is determined in step S1309 that the second AT start flag has not been set, the winning result corresponding processing is terminated. As already explained, when the second AT flag is set, an additional lottery using the second AT additional lottery table is performed.

After executing the process of step S1308 or step S1311, the process of inputting 50 to the AT counter is executed in step S1312. As already explained, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and in this embodiment, 50 games are set as the initial number of games in either the first AT mode or the second AT mode. . The number of initial games may differ between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, or the number of initial games may be determined by lottery. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of initial games tends to be larger in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

At step S1313, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed, and at step S1314, the process of setting the AT mode flag is executed. The AT mode flag is for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the AT mode. Then, in step S1315, after executing a process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result handling process is terminated.

Next, the third number-of-games management process in step S1305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the third number-of-games management process, a process for ending the AT mode is executed.

In the third game number management process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. If neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is stored (if not in the BB state), the process advances to step S1602 to determine whether or not the AT mode flag is stored in the flag storage area 106d. do.

If the AT mode flag is stored (if the AT mode is in progress), it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the AT counter value provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is zero. If the AT counter value is 0 (the number of AT mode remaining games is 0), the process advances to step S1604 to clear (delete) the AT mode flags stored in the flag storage area 106d. This terminates the AT mode. After that, in step S1605, an AT end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The AT end command is a command for notifying the display control device 81 that the AT mode has ended.

After execution of step S1605, if affirmative determination is made in step S1601 (BB state), negative determination is made in step S1602 (not in AT mode), or negative determination is made in step S1603 (remaining game in AT mode). If the number is 1 or more), the third game number management process is terminated.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S315 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and based on the lottery result. This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, in step S1703, a process of adding 1 to the normal counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The normal counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games started in the normal period, not in the advantageous period.

After executing the process of step S1703, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag is set in step S1704. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1705. Then, in step S1706, processing for setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1707, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval.

After executing the advantageous interval transition game processing in step S1708, or when it is determined that the advantageous interval flag is set in step S1702, whether the CZ mode flag or the AT mode flag is set in step S1708 judge. As already explained, in the present embodiment, in the AT mode or the CZ mode, it is possible to notify the pushing order when the pushing order bell is won. can be said to be a situation in which the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is satisfied. If any one of these flags is set, in step S1709, the display of the section display is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1710 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1710, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

Even if it is determined in step S1704 that neither the advantageous section flag nor the advantageous section winning game flag is set, or if the advantageous section flag or the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the CZ mode flag If the AT mode flag is not set and the normal mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1711. In step S1711, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step S1709 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1710, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1711 or step S1712, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1713. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1714, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1713 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step S1714, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1713 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1714, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1713. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S1802, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S1802, in step S1803, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1803, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay winning prize, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1803, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1804, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1805.

The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, the number of advantageous zone games AG (number of games completed in the advantageous zone), an AT counter (number of remaining games in AT mode), a CZ counter (number of remaining games in CZ mode), and an omen counter (remaining number of games in omen mode) is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation.

The remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. . In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is greater than the advantageous zone increase/decrease number. Determine whether there are many situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S1806, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether or not the number of advantageous interval increases/decreases MY has reached the upper limit of the number of increases of 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1807. In the subsequent step S1808, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1809, processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed, and in step S1810, processing for clearing the normal counter is performed.

In the advantageous interval information initialization processing in step S1809, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the current advantageous interval and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous interval are returned to their initial values. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, various CZ mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous interval AG, the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous interval MY, the omen counter for the omen mode, the counter for the number of continuous games such as the CZ mode, etc., are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and the RAM is cleared for these variables or parameters.

After execution of step S1810 or when a negative determination is made in step S1806 (when the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase), this section display number 2 Finish the process. Note that in the second section display process, as in steps S1201 and S1202 of the number-of-games update process (FIG. 39), a process for grasping the current game state and whether or not the number of bets corresponds to the game state is performed. Do not execute the determination process. Therefore, the number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games played in the advantageous section) and the number of increased/decreased number of the advantageous section MY (the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section minus the number of inserted medals in the advantageous section) are determined by the number of games played. It is updated each time the game is executed, regardless of the number of bets when winning (step S1802). In other words, the update process for the number of games and medal increase/decrease performed in the advantageous section is different from the number of remaining games in Omen mode, CZ mode, and AT mode, even if the game is played with the number of bets set to 2. executed.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 46, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to an advantageous section that has an instruction function such as the pressing order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win a lottery to transition to the advantageous section by winning a small win 7 (watermelon), etc., the number of games executed in the advantageous section from the game next to the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established ( The counting of the number of games in the advantageous section AG) is started. Then, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won in the advantageous section, and the winning notification and the AT mode flag are set, etc., and the state where the pressing order notification can occur, the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is met. Then, the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

After that, under the condition that the eighth display segment N8 is lit, the pressing order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can figure out the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, etc., when the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. ends. In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is completed in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted from the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous interval has been won, while the pressing order is announced only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. Occur. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, in a section (non-specific section) in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the push order notification does not occur. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to enjoy at least the benefits of the pushing order notification among the advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). can be clearly understood. By doing so, for example, whether the medal increase is generated by enjoying the benefit of the pushing order notification in the advantageous section, or the benefit of the pushing order notification is illegally received even though it is not in the advantageous section. Thus, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to clearly confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes an increase in medals is being carried out.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1902. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, or after the processing of step S1902 has been executed, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step S1904, effect setting processing at the time of betting is executed for setting the effect based on the current betting operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, or if the process of step S1904 has been executed, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the command corresponding to the lottery result Omen start command, omen game count update command, CZ win command, CZ game count update command, CZ addition command, AT win command, AT game count set in processing (Fig. 27) and game count update processing (Fig. 39) There is an update command, etc. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1906.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905, or if the process of step S1906 has been executed, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1908, effect setting processing at each stop operation for setting the effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, or if the process of step S1908 has been executed, it is determined in step S1909 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stopped command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the command, the sign end command, CZ start command, CZ end command, 1st AT winning notification command, 2nd AT winning notification command, AT There are a start command, an AT add-on command, an AT end command, a first BB start command, a second BB start command, a first BB end command, a second BB end command, and the like. In the case of these command at the time of all stop, at step S1910, effect setting processing at the time of all stop is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1909, or after the processing of step S1910 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1911, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1911, setting effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main controller 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. If the push order notification command has been received, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply B. If the push order notification command is set in the game that is normal reply B, it means that it is the start game of the first AT mode. Setting processing for performing notification effect is executed.

If the determination in step S2103 is negative, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply C. If the push order notification command is set in the game that is usually reply C, it means that it is the start game of the second AT mode. Setting processing for performing notification effect is executed.

A negative determination in step S2105 means that the result of the lottery for the current game is the winning of the bell in order of pressing. A setting is executed so that the pressing order notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. - 特許庁

If it is determined in step S2101 that the lottery result of the current game is not winning a second hand, it is determined in step S2108 whether or not the lottery result of this game is winning a specific role. The specific combination is a lottery result called a rare combination that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game. And watermelon is set as a specific role. As shown in FIG. 30, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the AT mode transition lottery is set to be more likely to be won than the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the lottery results other than the specific role. If the lottery result of the game this time is a winning of a special combination, a special combination notification process is executed in step S2109. The special combination notification process will be described later in detail.

After execution of step S2104, step S2106, step S2107 or step S2109, it is determined in step S2110 whether or not a command to add the number of CZ games has been received. When the command for adding the number of CZ games has been received, setting processing of the effect for adding the number of CZ games is executed in step S2111. In the CZ game number addition performance setting processing, as notification corresponding to the fact that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode has been added, the addition performance of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display part 65 is executed. The mode of the additional effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the additional effect is performed. For example, the number of additional games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the additional effect is performed. A mode may be included, or, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode is included in a so-called add-on effect that executes an add-on effect when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining). .

When the negative determination is made in step S2110, or after the process of step S2111 is executed, the effect setting process during bonus is executed in step S2112, and the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2113. In the following step S2114, continuous effect standby processing is executed, and in step S2115, continuous effect execution processing is executed. Each process of steps S2112 to S2115 will be described later in detail.

After execution of step S2115, in step S2116, other start time effect setting processing is executed, and then this start time effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2116, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to inform that the operation has been accepted, etc. is performed.

<About continuous production>
The continuous effect according to the present embodiment performs a series of effects over a plurality of games, and notifies whether or not the final game wins the transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode. At that time, the continuous effect is performed in accordance with the progress of the portent mode so that the notification of winning the transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode is performed in accordance with the end timing of the portent mode set by the main controller 101. , the start timing (start game of continuous effect) is controlled.

However, as described above, when the game is played with the number of bets that does not match the specific prescribed number (when the number of bets is set to 2 and the start lever 41 is operated), the remaining game in the portent mode in the main controller 101 The numbers are not updated, effectively extending the period of precursor mode. As a result, the winning notification game in the continuous effect does not synchronize with the end timing of the omen mode. Inconvenience such as the informing effect being slow to be executed may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the structure of the continuous effect is devised in order to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience. A specific configuration thereof will be described in detail below.

<Continuous production setting process>
The continuous effect setting process in step S2113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The continuous effect setting process is a setting process for executing the continuous effect for this omen (continuous effect for informing winning such as CZ mode).

In the continuous effect setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command is received. If neither the 1st BB end command nor the 2nd BB end command has been received, the flow advances to step S2202 to determine whether or not the precursor start command has been received. The portent start command is a command transmitted when main controller 101 shifts to the portent mode, and this step determines whether or not transition to the portent mode has started.

If the precursor start command has been received (if the shift to the precursor mode has started), the process advances to step S2203 to set (store) this precursor flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. This omen flag indicates that the continuous effect is triggered by winning the game number of CZ mode, AT mode, or AT mode. This is for the CPU 181 to grasp that notification (success effect or victory effect) should be executed.

In the following step S2204, it is determined whether or not a pseudo precursor flag is stored in each flag storage area 183a. The pseudo-prediction flag indicates that this continuous performance is not triggered by winning the CZ mode, etc. In other words, it is a notification corresponding to non-winning of each of the above modes as the end of the continuous performance (failure performance or defeat performance). is for the CPU 181 to grasp that should be executed.

If the pseudo portent flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2205 to grasp the number of continuing games in the current portent mode. This processing is performed based on the precursor start command transmitted from main controller 101 . In the next step S2206, a value corresponding to the number of continuing games in the current precursor mode grasped in step S2205 is set in the main precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. FIG. This portent counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games in the portent mode, in other words, for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the portent mode. That is, in this embodiment, the CPU 102 on the main control device 101 side and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side are configured to manage the number of remaining games in the portent mode.

After execution of step S2206, the effect table for this portent is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 in step S2207.

Here, an outline of the continuous effect will be described. In the present embodiment, a first continuous effect and a second continuous effect are provided as continuous consecutive effects. First, the first continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG.

The first continuous effect is composed of a start effect executed in the start game of the continuous effect, a preparation effect executed thereafter, and a final effect executed after the preparation effect. The final production of the first continuous production is a transformation production showing whether or not the girl character 201 can transform into the wizard character 202, and the preparatory production is an item acquisition production for acquiring items (transformation goods) for the transformation production. It's becoming

In the starting effect of the first continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 58A, on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65, the girl character 201 and a character image 203 such as "I will transform!" This start effect is executed, for example, when the start lever 41 is operated in the start game of the continuous effect. Note that the start effect is executed over one game.

In the preparation effect (item acquisition effect) of the first continuous effect, first, as shown in FIGS. As shown in a) to (c), an item image 205 is displayed on the same display screen. The item image 205 is displayed so as to appear from the treasure box image 204 .

Treasure box effects A (FIG. 58(b)) and treasure box effects B (FIG. 58(c)) with different colors of the treasure box are prepared as the treasure box effects in which the treasure box image 204 is displayed. It suggests the degree of expectation for winning the mode, etc. For example, treasure box effect B in which a red treasure box image 204b is displayed has a higher winning expectation in CZ mode or the like than treasure box effect A in which a yellow treasure box image 204a is displayed.

Item effects A to C with different types of items are prepared as the item effects in which the item image 205 is displayed. there is For example, the item effect C in which the stick image 205c is displayed has the highest degree of expectation for winning such as CZ mode, the item effect A in which the toothbrush image 205a is displayed is the lowest, and the item effect B in which the pendant image 205b is displayed is the highest. It is located in the middle.

The preparation effect is executed over one game. Specifically, when the start lever 41 is operated (when the reels 32L to 32R start to rotate) in the execution game of the preparation effect, the treasure box effect is started, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, Alternatively, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated (for example, when the final stop operation is performed), the item effect is started.

In the final presentation (transformation presentation) of the first continuous presentation, as shown in FIG. 60, an image of the transformation process of the girl character 201 into the wizard character 202 is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65, and then the transformation succeeds. A result image will be displayed to indicate whether the operation will succeed or fail. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 60(a), a scene in which the girl character 201 casts a spell for transforming herself is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. A state of being surrounded by dazzling light is displayed. When an item has been acquired in the preparation effect, the girl character 201 in FIG. 60(a) is displayed holding the acquired item. When notification corresponding to winning such as CZ mode is performed, as shown in FIG. 60(c1), the light subsides and the resulting image (final image) in which the wizard character 202 that has successfully transformed appears is displayed. On the other hand, when notification corresponding to non-winning such as CZ mode is performed, as shown in FIG. 60(c2), the light subsides and a result image is displayed in which the girl character 201 that has failed to transform appears.

The final effect is executed over two games. Specifically, when the start lever 41 is operated (when the reels 32L to 32R start rotating) in the execution game of the final effect, the image shown in FIG. After a lapse of time or when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated (for example, when the first stop operation is performed), the image shown in FIG. 60(b) is displayed. After that, when the start lever 41 is operated in the next game (when the reels 32L to 32R start rotating), the image shown in FIG. 60(c1) or FIG. 60(c2) is displayed.

Next, the second continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 61-63. The second continuous performance is also composed of a start performance executed in the start game of the continuous performance, a preparation performance executed thereafter, and a final performance executed after the preparation performance. The final effect of the second continuous effect is a battle effect as to whether or not the warrior character 211 can defeat the enemy character 212, and the preparatory effect is to acquire items (weapons) for the battle effect. It is an item acquisition production to acquire. The number of games to be executed and the start timing of each effect are the same as in the case of the first continuous effect.

In the starting effect of the second continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 61(a), a character image 213 such as "Prepare for battle!" be. In addition, in the preparation effect (item acquisition effect) of the second continuous effect, first, the treasure box effect A (FIG. 61(a)) or the treasure box effect B (FIG. 61(b)) is executed as in the first continuous effect. After that, as shown in FIGS. 62(a) to (c), an item effect in which an item image 215 is displayed is executed. In the item effects, for example, the item effect C in which the gun image 215c is displayed has the highest expectation of winning such as CZ mode, the item effect A in which the toothbrush image 215a is displayed is the lowest, and the item in which the knife image 215b is displayed. The performance B is located in the middle.

In the final effect (battle effect) of the second continuous effect, as shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), an image of the warrior character 211 attacking and an image of the enemy character 212 being attacked are displayed. By showing the ending of the above, a result image is displayed to notify whether or not the CZ mode or the like has been won. Specifically, in the case of notification corresponding to winning in the CZ mode or the like, as shown in FIG. In the case of notification corresponding to non-winning, an image of the warrior character 211 being defeated by the enemy character 212 is displayed as shown in FIG. 63(c2).

Then, in the continuous effect according to the present embodiment, the first continuous effect or the second continuous effect is executed over the number of games selected by lottery out of 3 to 5 games.

Returning to the description of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49), in the present sign effect table acquired in step S2207, as shown in FIG. Each production scenario is set for each of the first continuous production and the second continuous production. Each of these production scenarios is a production of successful transformation or battle victory as the final production, and is intended to notify the winning of the CZ mode or the like. Incidentally, when the number of games to be executed is 3, the preparation effect (item acquisition effect) is not executed, and the final effect (transformation effect or battle effect) is executed after the start effect. , each production scenario is configured such that the preparation production is executed twice after the start production, and then the final production is executed.

In this portent effect table, the probability of selecting 5 games as the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect is the highest, and the probability of selecting 3 games is the lowest. Therefore, the greater the number of games executed in the continuous effect, the higher the expectation for winning the CZ mode or the like.

After acquiring the effect table for this portent in step S2207, lottery processing for continuous effect is executed in step S2208. In the continuous effect lottery process, a random number for the continuous effect lottery is obtained, and the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect and the effect scenario to be executed are determined by using the obtained random number and the obtained effect table for the sign. I do.

In subsequent step S2209, a scenario data table corresponding to the effect scenario determined by the lottery process is created as effect data setting processing. This scenario data table is stored (set) in the effect setting data storage area 183 c of the RAM 183 . In the scenario data table, as shown in FIG. 51, the information of the effect animation to be executed in each game is set in association with the number of consecutive games to be executed. In this embodiment, the value of the continuous effect counter is used as the number of games to be executed for the continuous effect. The continuous effect counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games executed in the continuous effect or the number of remaining games, and is decremented by one for each game in which the continuous effect is being executed.

For example, in the above-mentioned lottery process, when the present precursor scenario K (scenario in which the number of games in which the continuous effect is executed is five and the transformation effect of the girl character 201 is executed) of FIG. 50 is selected as the effect scenario of the current continuous effect. , in the scenario data table, as shown in FIG. 51(a), information corresponding to the effect moving image of the precursor scenario K-1 (start effect) is set as information of the effect to be executed in the first game. As the information of the effect to be executed in the third game, the information of the effect animation corresponding to the present precursor scenario K-2 (effect of obtaining the pendant) is set, and the information of the effect to be executed in the third game is the present precursor scenario K-3 (playing the stick). Effect animation information corresponding to the effect to be acquired) is set, and effect animation information corresponding to the present precursor scenario K-4 (transformation attempt effect) is set as information of the effect to be executed in the fourth game, and 5 games. As the information of the effect to be executed on the eyes, the information of the effect animation corresponding to the precursor scenario K-5 (the effect of successful transformation) is set. The information of the effect moving image may be identification information indicating the moving image data (specific information attached to each effect moving image), or information indicating the storage area in which the moving image data is stored (address information of the ROM 182). ).

Further, in step S2209, in the scenario data table, along with the effect scenario of the continuous effect, the information of the effect animation of the preliminary precursor scenario is set. This omen preliminary scenario is set separately from the original continuous effect (in other words, it is not set as the original continuous effect), and if the number of omen games is not updated during the execution of the continuous effect (bet This is a preliminary effect for the case where the game is started with the number set to 2).

Preliminary precursor scenarios are provided for the first continuous effect and for the second continuous effect, respectively. ing. In addition, in each of the preliminary precursor scenarios, a plurality of types of effects are prepared according to the number of games in which continuous effects are executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51(a), when the main precursor scenario K is selected as a production scenario for continuous production, the main precursor scenario K corresponding to the main precursor scenario K is set in the scenario data table. . This preliminary omen scenario K is composed of main preliminary omen scenarios K1 to K-3 and a plurality of effects for transformation, and each effect corresponds to the value of the effect counter.

The present preliminary precursor scenario K-1 in which the value of the continuation counter is 5 has relevance in the content of presentation in relation to the present precursor scenario K-1. In the production of this preliminary precursor scenario K-1, for example, as shown in FIG. to be displayed.

This preliminary omen scenario K-2 in which the value of the continuous counter is 4 suggests a red treasure chest as related to this omen scenario K-2 or heightens expectations for it. In the rendering of this preliminary omen scenario K-2, for example, as shown in FIG. displayed on the screen.

This preliminary precursor scenario K-3 in the case where the value of the continuous counter is 3 suggests a stick (item acquired in this precursor scenario K-3) as related to this precursor scenario K-3 or gives a sense of expectation for it. It is meant to be enhanced. In the production of this preliminary omen scenario K-3, for example, as shown in FIG. displayed on the screen.

When the value of the continuous counter is 2 or 1, this preliminary precursor scenario - for transformation is related to the precursor scenarios K-4 and K-5, suggesting the success of the transformation or raising expectations for it. ing. In this preparatory scenario for the sign-transformation, for example, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. It should be noted that the main precursor scenario - for transformation is a common preliminary production for the main precursor scenarios A, C to E, and I to K for the first continuous production.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), when the main precursor scenario H is selected as the production scenario for continuous production, the main precursor scenario H corresponding to the main precursor scenario H is set. This preliminary omen scenario H is also composed of a plurality of effects, each of which corresponds to the value of the effect counter.

The present preliminary precursor scenario H-1 in the case where the value of the continuation counter is 4 has relevance in the content of presentation in relation to the present precursor scenario H-1. In the production of this preliminary precursor scenario H-1, for example, as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

This preliminary omen scenario H-2 in which the value of the continuation counter is 3 suggests a red treasure chest as related to this omen scenario H-2, or raises expectations for it. In the rendering of this preliminary omen scenario H-2, for example, as shown in FIG. displayed on the screen.

When the value of the continuous counter is 2 or 1, this preliminary precursor scenario - for battle is associated with the precursor scenarios H-3 and H-4, suggesting the victory of the battle or increasing the expectation of victory. ing. In this preparatory scenario--battle production, for example, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. It should be noted that the main precursor scenario for battle is a common preliminary production for the main precursor scenarios B, F to H, and L to N for the second continuous production.

Returning to the description of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49), after executing the effect data setting process (scenario data table creation process) in step S2209, in step S2210, various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 Set a value in the effect waiting counter. The effect standby counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of standby games until the continuous effect is started. For example, when the number of continuous games (the number of remaining games) in the omen mode ascertained in step S2205 is 10 games, and the number of consecutive games selected in the lottery process in step S2208 is 4 games, the effect Set 6 as the value of the wait counter.

In step S2211, a value is set to a continuous effect counter provided in various counter areas 183b of RAM183. As described above, the continuous effect counter is for counting the number of continuous effect execution games or the number of remaining games. If it is a game, 4 is set as the value of the effect standby counter.

Next, in step S2212, an effect standby flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183, and then the continuous consecutive output setting process is terminated. The effect waiting flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that it is in a state of waiting for the start of the continuous effect.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204 (if a false portent flag is stored), the process advances to step S2213 to clear the false portent flag stored in the flag storage area 183a. In the subsequent step S2214, the values of the pseudo precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 are cleared to zero. The pseudo precursor counter will be described later. After execution of step S2214, the process advances to step S2205 to execute processing for grasping the number of continuing games or the number of remaining games in the precursor mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201 (if the first BB end command or the second BB end command is received), the flow advances to step S2215 to check whether or not the present portent flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. judge. When the present portent flag is stored, the process of acquiring the present portent effect table in step S2207 is executed, and when the present portent flag is not stored, the present continuous effect setting process is terminated.

<Special role notification process>
The specific winning notification process in step S2109 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special combination informing process is for setting a continuous effect for a pseudo omen (continuous effect for informing non-winning such as CZ mode).

In the special combination notification process, first, in step S2301, a chance effect lottery process for determining whether or not to set the chance effect as the effect of the current game is executed. In the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 66(d), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Chance!!" Make them correspond and display them respectively. It should be noted that the odds of winning the chance effect lottery process may differ depending on the type of specific combination, game state, set value, and the like.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2301 has been won. If the player wins, in step S2303, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game.

After the execution of step S2303 or when a negative determination is made in step S2302 (when the chance production lottery is not won), in steps S2304 to S2306, as a command at the start of this time, an omen start command, CZ addition command or AT It is determined whether or not any winning command is included. If any one of these commands is included, this special combination notification process is terminated, and if none of these commands are included, a pseudo precursor mode execution lottery is executed in step S2307.

The pseudo omen mode is a mode for making the player expect that the transition has been made (in other words, the player has won the CZ mode or the like), although the transition to the omen mode has not actually occurred. In the embodiment, the period of the pseudo-prediction mode is used to execute a continuous effect for informing non-winning such as CZ mode. As in the case of the precursor mode, the number of games to be continued in the pseudo precursor mode is often set to be greater than the number of games in the continuous effect. At that time, a stimulating effect (effect other than the continuous effect) is performed to make the player expect winning in the period before the start of the continuous effect. Although there is a difference in degree, this fanning effect is also performed during the period before the start of the continuous effect in the omen mode, so it is impossible or difficult for the player to clearly distinguish between the omen mode and the pseudo omen mode. .

In step S2308, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery for the pseudo precursor mode in step S2307 has been won. If the winning has not been won, the process for informing the special combination is terminated, and if the winning has been won, the process proceeds to step S2309 to set (store) a pseudo precursor flag in the various flag storage area 183a. The pseudo precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the pseudo precursor mode is on.

Next, in step S2310, a pseudo-prediction effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182. FIG. The pseudo-predictive effect table is for drawing lots of continuous effect effect scenarios in the case of informing non-winning in CZ mode or the like. As shown in FIG. 53, in the pseudo-omen effect table, each effect scenario corresponding to the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect is set for each of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect as the effect scenario for the pseudo omen. there is In each of these production scenarios, the transformation failure or battle defeat is produced as the final production. In the pseudo portent effect table, the probability of selecting 3 games as the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect is the highest, and the probability of selecting 5 games is the lowest.

After acquiring the effect table for pseudo portent in step S2310, lottery processing for continuous effect is executed in step S2311. In the lottery process for the continuous performance, a random number for the continuous performance lottery is obtained, and the number of games to be executed for the continuous performance and the performance scenario to be executed are determined by using the obtained random number and the obtained pseudo-predictive performance table. I do.

In step S2312, as a process of setting effect data, a scenario data table corresponding to the effect scenario determined by the lottery process is created and stored (set) in the effect setting data storage area 183c of the RAM183. Similarly to the scenario data table for the real sign (FIG. 51), in the scenario data table for the pseudo sign, the information of the effect moving image to be executed in each game is set in association with the number of consecutive games to be played. However, in the scenario data table for the pseudo precursor, the information of the effect animation of the preliminary scenario is not set.

In step S2313, values are set in the pseudo precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. FIG. The pseudo omen counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the pseudo omen mode. In step S2314, a value is set in the effect standby counter provided in the various counter areas 183b, and in subsequent step S2315, a value is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The processing of steps S2314 and S2315 is the same as the processing of steps S2201 and S2211 in the continuous selection setting processing (FIG. 49).

After execution of step S2315, in step S2316, an effect standby flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the continuous consecutive output setting process is terminated.

<Continuous production waiting process>
The continuous effect waiting process in step S2114 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The continuous effect waiting process controls the start timing (start game) of each continuous effect for the real sign and the pseudo sign.

In the continuous effect standby process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the effect standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM183. If it is determined that the effect standby flag is stored (in the case of the continuous effect standby state), the process proceeds to step S2402, and it is determined whether or not this precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a.

If it is determined that this portent flag is stored, the process advances to step S2403 to determine whether or not a portent game number update command has been received as the command at the start of this time. The portent game number update command is a command indicating that the number of remaining games in the portent mode has been updated in main controller 101 . If it is determined that the precursor game count command has been received, the value of the precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is subtracted by 1 in step S2404.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402 (the real precursor flag is not stored), it means that the pseudo precursor flag is stored. 1 is subtracted from the value of the provided pseudo precursor counter.

After step S2404 or step S2405 is executed, in step S2406, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effect standby counter provided in the counter area 183b. As a result, the number of standby games until the continuous effect is started is updated. In the subsequent step S2407, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter is 0, that is, whether or not the number of waiting games until the continuous effect is started is 0.

When the value of the effect counter is not 0 (when the number of waiting games is 1 or more), the process for waiting for continuous effect is ended by continuing to wait for the start of the continuous effect. On the other hand, if the value of the effect counter is 0, the effect standby flag stored in the various flags storage area 183a is cleared (deleted) in step S2408, and in the subsequent step S2409, the various flags storage area 183a. Set (store) a continuous effect flag in . The continuous effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect should be executed and that the continuous effect is being executed. After execution of step S2409 or when a negative determination is made in step S2401 (when the effect standby flag is not stored), this continuous effect standby process is terminated.

Also, when a negative determination is made in step S2403 (when the number-of-prediction-games command is not received), the process for waiting for continuous effect is terminated without executing the processes after step S2404. That is, when the number-of-prediction-games command is not received and the number of remaining games in the predictor mode is not updated in the main control device 101, the subtraction processing (update processing) of the present prediction counter and the effect standby counter is not executed.

<Continuous effect execution processing>
The continuous effect execution processing in step S2115 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The continuous effect execution processing is performed continuously based on the scenario data for the real sign set in the continuous effect setting processing (FIG. 49) and the scenario data for the pseudo sign set in the special combination notification processing (FIG. 52). It performs the process of executing the production.

In the continuous effect execution processing, it is first determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 in step S2501. When it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not stored (when the situation is not such that the continuous effect should be executed), this continuous effect execution processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag is stored (when the continuous effect should be executed), it is checked in step S2502 whether or not this precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. judge. That is, it is determined whether it is a situation in which a continuous effect for the real sign should be executed or a situation in which a continuous effect for the pseudo-sign should be executed.

If it is determined that the present portent flag is stored (if the situation is such that the continuous effect for the present portent should be executed), proceed to step S2503, whether the second BB start command is received as the command at the start of this time determine whether or not The second BB start command is a command indicating the start of the second BB state. When the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 during execution of the continuous effect for the present omen, the second BB winning may be established and the second BB state may be started. This step determines whether or not such initiation of the second BB state has occurred.

If the second BB start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not a portent game number update command has been received as the current start time command. If the command for updating the number of precursor games has been received and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has been updated by main controller 101, the process proceeds to step S2505. In step S2505, based on the scenario data for the main precursor set in the continuous production setting process (FIG. 49), the production of the main precursor scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous production counter at that time is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), in a situation where the main precursor scenario H is set as the continuous production for the main precursor, if the value of the continuous production counter at that time is 3, the current The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect of the precursor scenario H-2 is executed in the game. In the following step S2506, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and then the process for executing this continuous effect is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504 (the command for updating the number of predictive games has not been received), the process proceeds to step S2507, and based on the scenario data for this predictive effect set in the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49), that The production of this premonitory scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous production counter at the time is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), in a situation where the main precursor scenario H is set as the continuous production for the main precursor, if the value of the continuous production counter at that time is 3, the current The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect of the preliminary precursor scenario H-2 is executed in the game.

After execution of step S2504, this continuous effect execution processing is terminated. That is, when the number of precursor games command is not received and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated in the main controller 101 (in other words, when the production of this preliminary scenario is executed), the continuous production counter Subtraction processing (update processing) is not executed.

If the determination in step S2503 is affirmative (if the second BB start command has been received), the process proceeds to step S2508, where the scenario data table (for continuous effect) stored in the effect setting data storage area 183c of the RAM 183 is stored. Clear (delete) the effect data). In the following step S2509, the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared (erased), and then the continuous effect execution processing is terminated. As a result, the continuous effect being executed is stopped.

When the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed, in the main controller 101, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated (step S1203 in FIG. 39), as in the case where the number of bets does not match the specific prescribed number. (if positive). However, in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is assumed that the bonus state will continue for a relatively long period of time, for example, about 30 games. In this way, even if the number of remaining games in the omen mode is not updated as in the case where the number of bets does not match the specific prescribed number, if the period is expected to continue for a long period of time, the preliminary effect will be performed. It is configured to stop the continuous performance itself without responding to it by execution.

For example, when the transition to the first BB state or the second BB state is performed, if a preliminary effect is inserted in the same manner as when a two-bet game is played, a large number of moving image data may be used as moving image data for this precursory preliminary scenario. It becomes necessary to prepare and store a large amount of such moving image data in the ROM 182 . As a result, there is a concern that the burden on the gaming machine designer will be increased and the capacity of the ROM 182 will be squeezed. In addition, since the preliminary performance is executed for a long time without progressing the content of the continuous performance, there is also the inconvenience that the player feels uncomfortable. In this regard, in the present embodiment, depending on the length of the period during which the number of remaining games in the omen mode is not updated, it is possible to select whether to respond with a preliminary effect or to stop the continuous effect itself, so the occurrence of each of the above inconveniences. can be suitably suppressed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2502 (the situation is such that the continuous effect for the pseudo sign should be executed), the process proceeds to step S2510, where the scenario data for the pseudo sign set in the special combination notification process (FIG. 52) is entered. , the pseudo precursor scenario rendering corresponding to the value of the continuous rendering counter at that time is executed. In the following step S2511, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b, and then this continuous effect execution processing is terminated. That is, when the situation is such that the continuous effect for the pseudo omen should be executed, regardless of whether or not the number of remaining games in the omen mode is updated, the execution processing of the pseudo omen scenario set as the continuous effect and the continuous effect Execute counter subtraction processing (update processing).

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The effect setting process at the time of all stop in step S1910 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the 1st AT winning notification command or the 2nd AT winning notification command has been received as the current all stop command. If any one of these commands has been received, in step S2602, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that an AT winning notification effect is performed in the current game. In the AT winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), characters such as "AT Confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. Note that when the 1st AT winning notification command is received, the AT winning notification effect corresponding to the 1st AT is performed, and when the 2nd AT winning notification command is received, the AT winning notification effect corresponding to the 2nd AT is performed. may be

If a negative determination is made in step S2601 (if the 1st AT winning notification command or the 2nd AT winning notification command has not been received), then in step S2603 it is determined whether or not the AT start command has been received as the current command for all stop. judge. When the AT start command is received, in step S2604, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the AT start effect is performed in the next game. In the AT start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(b), characters such as "AT start!!"

If a negative determination is made in step S2603 (if an AT start command has not been received), it is determined in step S2605 whether or not an AT end command has been received as the current all-stop command. When the AT end command is received, in step S2606, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that the AT end effect is performed in the current game. In the AT end presentation, for example, characters such as "AT END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG. 66(c).

If a negative determination is made in step S2605 (if an AT end command has not been received), it is determined in step S2607 whether or not a CZ start command has been received as the current all-stop command. When the CZ start command has been received, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ start effect is performed in the next game. In the CZ start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(c), characters such as "CZ mode start" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2607 (if the CZ start command has not been received), it is determined in step S2609 whether or not a CZ end command has been received as the current all-stop command. When the CZ end command has been received, at step S2610, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ end effect is performed in the current game. In the CZ end presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(d), characters such as "CZ mode end" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2609 (if the CZ end command has not been received), it is determined in step S2611 whether or not a precursor end command has been received as the current all-stop command. When the portent end command is received, at steps S2612 and S2613, the main portent flag and the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 are cleared (erased).

If a negative determination is made in step S2611 (if the sign end command is not received), it is determined in step S2614 whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is 0. . When the value of the continuous effect counter is 0, at steps S2615 and S2616, the pseudo precursor flag and the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a are cleared (erased).

In subsequent step S2617, it is determined whether or not the second BB state is being executed. When the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 during execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo omen, the 2nd BB prize may be established and the state may shift to the 2nd BB state. This step is for determining whether or not the second BB state thus shifted is being executed. If it is determined in step S2617 that the second BB state is being executed, the process advances to step S2618 to set (store) the pseudo precursor end flag in the various flag storage area 183a. The pseudo sign end flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect for the pseudo sign has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2614 (the value of the continuous effect counter is not 0), in step S2619, whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received as the current full stop command. judge. If any one of these commands has been received, in step S2620, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that a bonus ending effect is performed in the current game. In the bonus end presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), characters such as "BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

After executing the processing of step S2602, step S2604, step S2606, step S2608, step S2610, step S2613, step S2618, or step S2620, or if a negative determination is made in step S2619, in step S2621, other stop time effects is set, the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2621, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, control is performed so that sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64, and control is performed during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

<Bonus production setting process>
The processing for setting effect during bonus in step S2112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus medium effect setting process, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not a pseudo precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. If it is determined that the pseudo precursor flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2702 to determine whether or not the first BB start command or the second BB start command has been received as the current start command. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the start game of the bonus game. The bonus game is started from the next game in which the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize is established, and ends when the total number of medals to be paid out from the start game reaches the maximum payout number.

If the 1st BB start command or the 2nd BB start command has been received, then in step S2703, a process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning or the second BB winning. Then, in step S2704, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type grasped in step S2703 is set.

In the bonus effect, for example, after the bonus start effect shown in FIG. 67(a) is executed on the auxiliary display section 65, a moving image effect by animation in which a predetermined character or the like appears is executed. A predetermined effect sound (dramatic sound) is also output from the speaker 64 . The animation production in the above case is set, for example, to repeatedly reproduce a 5-minute animation video. It should be noted that it is also possible to have a configuration in which the progress of the rendering on the auxiliary display section 65 is stopped when the five-minute animation video ends, and only the sound effect is repeated.

Incidentally, the bonus game according to the present embodiment is one in which the number of medals is reduced, which is not desirable for the player. A configuration may be adopted in which only the animation is displayed without performing the ending effect of the .

After execution of step S2704, this processing for setting effect during bonus is terminated. Also, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2701 (when the continuous effect for the pseudo sign is being executed), the process of setting the effect during bonus is finished without executing the processes after step S2702. That is, when the second BB state is started while the continuous performance for the pseudo omen is being executed, priority is given to continuation of the continuous performance without starting the bonus performance.

If the determination in step S2702 is negative (if the first BB start command or second BB start command has not been received), the process advances to step S2705 to determine whether or not the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed. . If any of these BB states is being executed, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not a pseudo precursor end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If the pseudo precursor end flag is stored, the pseudo precursor end flag is cleared (deleted) in step S2707, and then the process proceeds to step S2703. That is, when the second BB state is started while the continuous performance for the pseudo sign is being executed, the bonus performance is started after the continuous performance being executed is finished. If a negative determination is made in step S2705 or step S2706, the processing for setting effect during bonus is terminated.

<About the flow of continuous production>
The flow of the continuous effect for this omen will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an example will be described in which the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second and fourth games from the start of the continuous effect, and the number of remaining games in the sign mode is not updated in these games. It is also assumed that, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the main precursor scenario H (continuous production of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected as the continuous production for the main precursor.

When the number of remaining games in the portent mode reaches 4, the starting effect of the present portent scenario H-1 is executed as the continuous effect for the present portent (FIG. 68(a)). Then, when the player plays the second game from the start of the continuous effect with the number of bets set to 2, the effect of this precursor preliminary scenario H-2 set in the scenario data table is executed as a preliminary effect. (FIG. 68(b)). After that, when the player plays the third game from the start of the continuous effect with the number of bets set to 3, the effect of the precursor scenario H-2 set in the scenario data table is performed as a preparatory effect (item acquisition effect). is executed (FIG. 68(c)).

That is, the production of the preliminary precursor scenario H-2 performed in two games from the start of the continuous production is the start production of the precursor scenario H-1 in the first game of the continuous production and the production that should be performed in the second game. It is performed so as to be inserted between the preparatory effect of the present precursor scenario H-2. For this reason, when a 2-bet game is played in the second game from the start of the continuous effect, the number of remaining games in the omen mode is not updated, and the end game of the omen mode (the end game that should be notified of winning in the continuous effect) ), even if a delay of one game occurs, the progress of the continuous performance is delayed accordingly, and the precursor mode and the continuous performance are synchronized.

When the player plays the game again with the bet number of 2 in the fourth game from the start of the continuous effect, the effect of this precursor preliminary scenario H-3 set in the scenario data table is executed as a preliminary effect ( FIG. 68(d)). As in the case of this preliminary precursor scenario H-2, the production of this preliminary precursor scenario H-3 is also the preparation production of this precursor scenario H-2, which should have been performed in the second game. It is performed so as to be inserted between the battle production of this precursor scenario H-3 that should have been performed.

Then, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3 in the fifth and sixth games from the start of the continuous effect, the final effect ( A battle effect) is executed (FIGS. 68(e), (f)), and winning information such as CZ mode is performed in the sixth game from the start of the continuous effect. In this case, the effect of this precursor scenario H-4, in which the winner is notified, is executed in the game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is 1 (the final game of the precursor mode). A state in which the degree of progress with the portent mode is synchronized.

In this way, since the preliminary effect is additionally executed in the game in which the number of remaining games in the omen mode is not updated, in the initial setting processing, the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect was set to four games, but the omen mode is changed to the omen mode. The continuation of the continuous performance is extended by two games in which the progression of the mode is delayed, and winning of the CZ mode or the like can be announced in the sixth game from the start of the continuous performance. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the lag between the end timing of the sign mode and the end timing of the continuous performance, which is caused by the fact that the number of remaining games in the sign mode is not updated, and for example, the success of the AT mode is announced in the continuous performance. In spite of this, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as the delay in execution of the pressing order notification effect for shifting to the AT mode.

Also, it is assumed that the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 in the period before the start of the continuous effect after the transition to the portent mode, and the number of remaining games in the portent mode is not updated. In this respect, in the present embodiment, based on the reception of the number-of-prediction game update command in the display control device 81, the values of the present-prediction counter and the effect standby counter are updated (see FIG. 54). When the update of the number of remaining games is stopped, the update of the number of standby games until the start of the effect is also stopped in synchronism with it. That is, when the sign mode is extended by not updating the number of remaining games in the sign mode during the period before the start of the continuous performance after the transition to the sign mode, the start of the continuous performance is delayed accordingly.

It should be noted that, during execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo omen, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 and the number of remaining games in the omen mode is not updated, unlike the case of the continuous effect for the real omen, Preliminary performance is not executed. In other words, regardless of the number of bets when the game is executed, the continuous effect for the pseudo sign is executed according to the initial settings. Also, even before the start of the continuous effect for the pseudo sign, the effect waiting counter is updated regardless of the number of bets during game execution, and the continuous effect is started in the game according to the initial settings.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of the flow in the case where the second BB winning is established during execution of the continuous effect for the present sign and the state is shifted to the second BB state. Here, in the second game from the start of the continuous effect, the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2, and in the game at that time, the symbol combination corresponding to the second BB (FIG. 13(f)) is stopped. will be described as an example. Also, as the continuous effect for the main omen, as shown in FIG. 51(b), it is assumed that the main omen scenario H (continuous effect of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected.

As already explained, in the game of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the basic style is to play the 3-bet game under the internal state (carry-over state) of winning the 2nd BB. However, since a 2-bet game is allowed, and a 2-bet game can be won in the 2-bet game (see FIG. 26), it is possible to shift to the 2-BB state during the continuous effect. is assumed. During the 2nd BB winning game (2 bet game) and the transition period (execution period) to the 2nd BB state, the number of remaining games in the sign mode is not updated (see FIG. 39). In the embodiment, continuous effects are executed as follows.

When the number of remaining games in the portent mode reaches 4, the starting effect of the present portent scenario H-1 is executed as the continuous effect for the present portent (FIG. 69(a)). After that, when the player plays the second game from the start of the continuous effect with the number of bets set to 2, the effect of this precursor preliminary scenario H-2 set in the scenario data table is executed as a preliminary effect. (FIG. 69(b)). In the game at that time, when the symbol combination corresponding to the second BB is stopped and the winning of the second BB is established, the continuous effect being executed is stopped.

Then, the next game shifts to the second BB state (the second BB bonus game is started), and the bonus effect is executed during the shift to the BB state. At this time, the precursor mode flag stored in the RAM 106 of the main controller 101 at the start of the bonus game is maintained without being cleared. Also in the display control device 81, the present precursor flag stored in the RAM 183 is not cleared and is maintained as it is (see FIG. 55). In other words, information indicating that the portent mode is on is internally held.

Then, when the second BB state ends and the player starts the next game, the display control device 81 executes within the range of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode at that time (three games in the example of FIG. 69). A possible continuous effect (continuous effect for the main sign) is drawn, and a new system data table is created (NO in step S2201 of FIG. 49, refer to steps S2215 and S2207). In other words, when the state shifts to the second BB state in the middle of the continuous performance, the continuous performance is temporarily stopped, and then a new continuous performance is executed as the second BB state ends.

For example, assuming that the present precursor scenario A (continuous presentation of three games in which the girl character 201 appears) is selected as a new continuous presentation, in the next game following the end of the second BB state, the player sets the number of bets to 3 and continues the game. If done, the effect of the precursor scenario A-1 is executed (FIG. 69(c)). Then, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3 in the second game and the third game from the start of the new continuous effect, the end of the precursor scenarios A-2 and A-3 set in the scenario data An effect (transformation effect) is executed (FIG. 69(d)). As a result, notification of winning such as CZ mode is performed.

Incidentally, when the state is shifted to the second BB state during execution of the continuous performance for the pseudo sign, the continuous performance is continued as it is (see FIG. 57). Then, when the continuous performance ends, the bonus performance is executed in the remaining bonus period.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous performance for this omen, the execution game of winning notification in the continuous performance is delayed.

In this embodiment, when a 2-bet game is played during the omen mode, the number of remaining games in the omen mode is not updated, and the ending game of the omen mode is delayed. On the other hand, since the continuous effect for this omen executed during the omen mode is set based on the omen mode before extension, if the continuous effect is executed as it is, the execution timing of the winning notification in the continuous effect and It will be out of sync with the end of the precursor mode. For this reason, there is a possibility that the transition to the CZ mode or the AT mode is delayed even though the winning is informed by the winning announcement during the continuous performance, and there is a concern that the player's confidence in the performance will be lowered. In this regard, in this configuration, when a 2-bet game is played during execution of the continuous effect, the winning notification is executed in such a way that the winning notification is performed in the game after the initially set winning notification execution game. Game is delayed. As a result, the timing of notification of winning can be delayed according to the extension of the portent mode, and the deviation between the portent mode and the continuous effect can be eliminated.

When the 2-bet game is performed during the execution of the continuous performance for the present omen and the omen mode is extended, a preliminary performance related to the continuous performance is executed to delay the execution game of the winning notification. .

According to this configuration, it is possible to fill the gap in the effect caused by delaying the notification of winning with the preliminary effect. At this time, if, for example, an effect unrelated to the continuous effect is executed as a preliminary effect, the player may be given the impression that the continuous effect suddenly ends. In particular, the player who has been watching the continuous performance while anticipating winning may be given the impression that the winning has disappeared, which may confuse the player. In this regard, in this configuration, since an effect related to the continuous effect is executed as the preliminary effect, the continuous effect executed before and after the preliminary effect can be suitably connected by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the continuous performance has been interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

When the preliminary performance is executed, the following continuous performance is executed in the subsequent 3-bet game.

In this configuration, when the 2-bet game is performed during execution of the continuous performance and the sign mode is extended, the preliminary performance is inserted in the middle of the continuous performance, and the continuous performance is resumed after the preliminary performance is executed. In other words, the continuous effect that should have been executed if the preliminary effect was not executed is executed after the preliminary effect is executed. For example, in the case of a story-tailored continuous effect, if a part of the continuous effect is missing, the flow of the effect becomes difficult to understand, but according to this configuration, the lack of the effect is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance flow up to the notification of winning in the same way as when the preliminary performance is not executed. In other words, it is possible to delay the execution timing of the notification of winning while achieving consistency in performance between the case where the preliminary performance is executed and the case where the preliminary performance is not executed.

Further, for example, after the execution of the preliminary effect, a dedicated effect different from the continuous effect is executed, or after the 2-bet game is performed without executing the preliminary effect in the first place, a dedicated effect for the case where the sign mode is extended is performed. It is also possible to change the presentation, but since it is not possible to specify in advance at what timing the 2-bet game will be played, no matter how many games are left in the omen mode when the 2-bet game is played In order to cope with this, it becomes necessary to prepare a large number of dedicated effects (movie data for dedicated effects, etc.) having different lengths. As a result, the burden of designing the performance increases significantly, and there is a concern that the storage area for the data of the original continuous performance and the data of other performances will be squeezed due to the increase in the amount of performance data. Furthermore, since it is necessary to perform the setting process for that purpose again when executing the dedicated effect, there is a possibility that the processing load on control of the effect is increased. In this regard, in this configuration, since the setting and effect data for the continuous effect can be diverted, it is possible to eliminate the need for the setting process for the dedicated effect and the preparation of the effect data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden of production design and an increase in the amount of data, and further to suppress an increase in the processing load on production control.

In addition, if a special effect different from the continuous effect is executed after the preliminary effect is executed, what should be done if the 2-bet game is played again during the execution of the exclusive effect and the omen mode is extended? There is a risk that new measures will be required. With this configuration, this point can be dealt with by inserting a preliminary effect each time, and new countermeasures can be eliminated. In other words, there is also an advantage that it is possible to flexibly cope with the case where the 2-bet game is played a plurality of times during execution of the continuous effect.

A plurality of types of preliminary performances are prepared according to the types of continuous performances, and when the 2-bet game is played and the sign mode is extended, the preliminary performances corresponding to the types of continuous performances being executed are executed. In this configuration, since the preliminary performance corresponding to the type of the continuous performance being executed is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when the preliminary performance is executed and the impression that the continuous performance is being performed is diminished. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the continuous performance has been interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

A preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order of each effect during the continuous effect is prepared, and if the 2-bet game is played and the sign mode is extended, the effect that was scheduled to be executed if the 2-bet game was not played ( For example, the configuration is such that the preliminary performance (the performance of the main precursor scenario H-2) corresponding to the execution order of the performance of the main precursor scenario H-2 is executed. For example, if the same effect is always executed regardless of which game during the continuous effect the preliminary effect is executed, the preliminary effect will hinder the flow of the continuous effect, and the player will feel uncomfortable. There is a concern that it may become difficult to understand the content of the production. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since it is possible to execute the preliminary effect in line with the flow of the continuous effect, it is possible to preferably prevent the flow of the continuous effect from being obstructed by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incompatibility or having difficulty in understanding the content of the continuous performance, and it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the preliminary performance.

In executing the preliminary performance, the configuration is such that the preliminary performance is executed in the game in which the 2-bet game is played. In this case, each time a delay of one game occurs in the omen mode, the extension can be filled with the preliminary effect. Therefore, when the portent mode is extended in the middle of the continuous performance, the portent mode and the continuous performance can be synchronized with a simple configuration.

A preliminary performance is set together with the continuous performance, and the preliminary performance setting processing is performed in the game before the game in which the preliminary performance is executed. According to this configuration, since the preliminary effect is set in advance, even if the player suddenly plays a 2-bet game, the preliminary effect can be executed smoothly by responding quickly. Also, when a 2-bet game is played during a continuous effect, depending on the execution status of other effects, the control processing may be in a high load state, but even in such a case, the processing drop occurs. can be suitably suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, all the preliminary effects that may be executed during the continuous effect are collectively set at the start of the continuous effect. In addition to being able to smoothly execute the preliminary performance, it is possible to execute the preliminary performance according to the setting even when the preliminary performance is executed in the start game (first game) of the continuous performance.

When a 2-bet game is played during execution of the continuous performance for the pseudo omen, the preliminary performance is not executed. Continuous effects for pseudo omens are executed irrespective of the omens mode, but if a 2-bet game is played during the execution of continuous effects that are not affected by such omens modes, preliminary effects are executed. By adopting a configuration in which it is not performed, it is possible to reduce the frequency of setting and execution of the preliminary effect, and it is possible to reduce the load of control processing.

When the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated by the main controller 101 , a precursor game number update command indicating the fact is transmitted to the display control device 81 .

Since the display control device 81 is entrusted with the control processing related to the game presentation, the processing load on the main control device 101 can be reduced. However, since the number of remaining games in the portent mode is managed by the main control device 101, there is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur in the recognition of the number of remaining games between the main control device 101 and the display control device 81, and the extension of the portent mode. There is a concern that the execution game of winning notification cannot be appropriately delayed. In this regard, in the present configuration, since a precursor game number update command indicating that the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has been updated is output to the display control device 81, whether or not the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has been updated in the main controller 101 is determined. The display control device 81 can suitably grasp whether or not. As a result, even with a configuration in which processing is shared between the main control device 101 and the display control device 81, discrepancies in recognizing the number of remaining games are suppressed, and execution of notification of winning in response to the extension of the omen mode. It becomes possible to delay the game appropriately.

In the case of shifting to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous performance for this sign, the continuous performance being executed is stopped and the bonus performance is executed.

If the transition to the second BB state occurs during execution of the continuous effect for the present sign, the number of remaining games in the sign mode is not updated during the execution period of the second BB bonus game, and the sign mode continues for a relatively long period of time. End game is delayed. Therefore, if the continuous performance is continued as it is, the portent mode ends with a great delay from the notification of winning in the continuous performance. In such a case, as in the case where the 2-bet game is played during the continuous effect, it is conceivable to extend the continuous effect by executing the preliminary effect for the period during which the bonus game is executed. It is not easy to prepare a preliminary performance just to fill the period, and there is a risk of greatly increasing the burden of designing the performance. In order to avoid such an inconvenience, it is conceivable to repeatedly execute a preliminary effect of a certain length during the bonus game. may give a bad impression. In this regard, in this configuration, when a transition to the second BB state occurs during the continuous performance, it is distinguished from the case where the 2-bet game is performed, and the continuous performance being executed is stopped and the bonus performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

While the continuous performance being executed is stopped when the continuous performance for the real sign is shifted to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous performance for the real sign, when the continuous performance for the pseudo sign is shifted to the second BB state during the execution, the continuous performance is being executed. It was configured to continue the continuous performance of.

In the above configuration, when the state shifts to the second BB state during execution of the continuous performance, whether or not to continue the continuous performance is switched according to the type of the execution trigger of the continuous performance. Therefore, when the continuous performance is stopped due to the shift to the second BB state, the player wins the CZ mode, etc., and when the continuous performance continues, the player determines that the CZ mode, etc. is not won. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to provide not only the enjoyment of the development of the continuous performance, but also the enjoyment of judging whether the continuous performance is continued or not.

When the continuous performance for the main sign is stopped by shifting to the second BB state, the continuous performance for the new sign is executed within the range of the number of remaining games of the sign mode after the end of the second BB state.

In the above configuration, winning notification is performed by the continuous performance after the second BB state, so even if the continuous performance is stopped due to the transition to the second BB state and the winning notification is not executed, the winning is appropriately awarded to the player. can let you know. At this time, for example, as a continuous effect after the second BB state, it is conceivable to continue the stopped continuous effect. may not remember. Even if the continuous performance is restarted in such a situation, the player cannot understand what has started, and there is a risk of causing confusion. In this regard, in this configuration, since a new continuous effect is executed anew, it is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion. Furthermore, since the continuous effect is executed according to the number of remaining games in the portent mode after the bonus game is finished, a new continuous effect can be finished in synchronization with the portent mode. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift to the CZ mode or the like after the winning notification is performed in the continuous effect after the bonus game.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, instead of inserting a preliminary effect each time a 2-bet game is played, the number of games in which the 2-bet game is played is counted, and a continuous effect of a length corresponding to the number of games is produced. The configuration is such that they are collectively executed at a predetermined timing. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, the scenario data table according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70(a). Here, an example will be described in which the main omen scenario H (four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected as the production scenario for the continuous production for the main omen. The scenario data table shown in FIG. 70(a) is created in step S2209 of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49).

In the scenario data table according to the present embodiment, the production of this preliminary precursor scenario as a preliminary production is set to the main preliminary precursor scenario H-Battle only when the value of the continuous production counter is 1. In the production of this premonitory scenario H-Battle, for example, as shown in FIG. After the display screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 70(c), an image of the warrior character 211 attacking is displayed on the display screen. In other words, the production of this preliminary omen scenario H-battle according to the present embodiment is such that the battle is not settled, and the warrior character 211 attacks again. 70(c) is executed when the start lever 41 is operated. ) is performed, the effect image is switched to that shown in FIG. 70(b).

<Continuous effect execution processing>
A continuous effect execution process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2115 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect execution process of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 71, the same step number is given to the same processing as the continuous effect execution processing of FIG. 55, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503 (if the second BB start command has not been received), it is determined in step S3001 whether or not a predictive game count update command has been received as the current start time command. If the command for updating the number of portent games has not been received and the number of remaining games in the portent mode has not been updated in the main control device 101, the flow advances to step S3002 to update the preliminary effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. Add 1 to the value. The preliminary effect counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times (the number of games) that the number of remaining games in the omen mode has not been updated.

After execution of step S3002 or when affirmative determination is made in step S3001 (when the number of precursor games update command is received), the process proceeds to step S3003, and the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is 1. It is determined whether or not. The continuous effect counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games of the continuous effect, and this step determines whether or not it is time to start the game when the number of remaining games of the continuous effect is 1. It is to be judged.

If it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is not 1, the process proceeds to step S3004, and the value of the continuous effect counter at that time is changed based on the scenario data for this sign set in the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49). Execute the production of the corresponding present omen scenario. For example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), in a situation where the main precursor scenario H is set as the continuous production for the main precursor, if the value of the continuous production counter at that time is 3, the current The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect of the precursor scenario H-2 is executed in the game. In the subsequent step S3005, the value of the continuous effect counter is decremented by 1, and then the process for executing this continuous effect is terminated.

If the determination in step S3003 is affirmative, that is, if it is time to start the game in a situation where the number of games remaining in the continuous effect is 1, preliminary effect processing is executed in step S3006, and then the main continuous effect is performed. Terminate the production execution process. In the preliminary effect processing of step S3006, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the value of the preliminary effect counter is 1 or more.

If it is determined that the value of the preliminary effect counter is equal to or greater than 1, then in step S3102, the preliminary effect set in the scenario data table (main precursor preliminary scenario H-battle effect) is executed. In the following step S3103, the value of the preliminary effect counter is decremented by 1, and then the process for this preliminary effect is finished.

If a negative determination is made in step S3101 (the value of the preliminary effect counter is 0), then in step S3104, based on the scenario data table, the main precursor scenario (the main precursor scenario) when the value of the continuous effect counter is 1 The effect of scenario H-4) is executed. In the following step S3105, the value of the continuous effect counter is decremented by 1, and then this preliminary effect processing is terminated.

<About the flow of continuous production>
Next, the flow of the continuous effect for the main sign in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an example will be described in which the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second and fifth games from the start of the continuous effect, and the number of remaining games in the portent mode is not updated in these games. It is also assumed that, as the continuous effect for the main omen, the main omen scenario H is selected as shown in FIG. 70(a).

When the number of remaining games in the portent mode reaches 4, the starting effect of the present portent scenario H-1 is executed as the continuous effect for the present portent (FIG. 73(a)). Then, in the second game from the start of the continuous effect, when the player plays the game with the bet number of 2, the preliminary effect is executed in the above-described first embodiment, but in the present embodiment, the above-described The item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of the present precursor scenario H-2, which follows the start effect, is executed (FIG. 73(b)). At that time, 1 is added to the value of the preliminary effect counter (step S3002 in FIG. 71), and the value of the counter becomes 1. After that, when the player plays the third game from the start of the continuous effect with the number of bets set to 3, the effect (battle effect) of the precursor scenario H-3 is executed (FIG. 73(c)).

Then, in the fourth game from the start of the continuous effect (the game in which the value of the continuous effect counter is 1 at the start of the game), when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3, this precursor set in the scenario data table Preliminary Scenario H-Battle production is executed (FIGS. 73(d) and (e)). At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3103 in FIG. 72), and the value of the counter becomes 0. In addition, since the value of the continuous effect counter is not updated when the preliminary effect is executed (the flow when the negative determination is made in step S3101 of FIG. 72), the value of the counter is maintained as 1.

After that, when the player again plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 in the fifth game from the start of the continuous effect, the value of the preliminary effect counter is incremented by 1, and the value of the counter becomes 1 again. As a result, the production of this preliminary precursor scenario H-Battle is executed in the game. At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter is decremented by 1, and the value of the counter becomes 0 again.

Then, in the sixth game from the start of the continuous effect, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3, the effect of the precursor scenario H-4 set in the scenario data is executed (FIG. 73(f)), and the CZ Winning information such as mode is performed. In this case, the effect of this precursor scenario H-4, in which the winner is notified, is executed in the game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is 1 (the final game of the precursor mode). A state in which the degree of progress with the portent mode is synchronized.

Incidentally, when the state shifts to the second BB state during execution of the continuous performance including the preliminary performance, the continuous performance is stopped in the same manner as in the first embodiment. At that time, the value of the preliminary effect counter is cleared to zero.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When a 2-bet game is played during continuous performance, the preliminary performance is not executed immediately, but the preliminary performance is executed in the game after the 2-bet game.

Also with the above configuration, similarly to the first embodiment, the timing of winning notification can be delayed according to the extension of the portent mode, and the deviation between the portent mode and the continuous performance can be eliminated. Further, in the above configuration, when the end of the sign mode is delayed by the 2-bet game, the continuation of the continuous effect is given priority, and the preliminary effect is postponed. In this case, if the game in which the preliminary effect is to be executed is set at a place with a good break in the development of the continuous effect, the preliminary effect will be placed at a halfway place with a bad break even if the 2-bet game is played at any timing. can be prevented from being inserted. Therefore, the continuous performance and the preliminary performance are suitably combined, and even when the length of the continuous performance is changed according to the delay of the omen mode, it is possible to execute the continuous performance with good appearance.

The number of 2-bet games played during the execution of the continuous performance (the number of delayed games in the omen mode) is grasped, and the preliminary performance of the length of the grasped number of times (delay) is collectively executed.

For example, when the 2-bet game is executed a plurality of times during execution of the continuous effect, there is a risk that the preliminary effect will be inserted many times during the continuous effect and the progress of the continuous effect will be interrupted frequently. In this regard, in this configuration, since the preliminary performance for the delay of the end of the omen mode is collectively executed, interruption of the continuous performance due to the preliminary performance can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the development of the effect from becoming difficult for the player to understand.

A preliminary performance counter for grasping the number of games to be executed for the preliminary performance is provided, and the preliminary performance counter is updated each time the preliminary performance for one game is executed. In this case, it is possible to appropriately implement the preliminary effect for the number of games corresponding to the extension. Further, when a 2-bet game is played during execution of the preliminary effect, the value of the preliminary effect counter is added. As a result, when a 2-bet game is played during the preliminary effect, the number of games executed in the preliminary effect can be increased. Therefore, even when the omen mode is further extended by the 2-bet game during the preliminary presentation, the notification of winning can be delayed following it, and the continuous presentation and the omen mode can be synchronized.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a 2-bet game is played during execution of the continuous effect for the main sign, the continuous effect is continued, and when a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo-sign. , the continuous performance is stopped. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, the scenario data table according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74(a). Here, an example will be described in which the main omen scenario H (four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected as the production scenario for the continuous production for the main omen. The scenario data table shown in FIG. 74(a) is created in step S2209 of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49).

In the scenario data table according to the present embodiment, only the main precursor scenarios H-1 to H-4 are set, and the preliminary scenarios are not set. That is, in the present embodiment, if the player starts the game with the number of bets set to 2 during execution of the continuous effect (when the number of remaining games in the sign mode is not updated), the preliminary effect is not executed.

<Continuous effect execution processing>
The continuous effect execution processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75 . This process is executed in step S2115 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect execution process of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 75, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the continuous effect execution processing of FIG. 55, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501 (when the continuous effect flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S3201, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo portent flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM183. The pseudo portent flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that a continuous effect for a pseudo portent (continuous effect for informing non-winning such as CZ mode) should be executed or is being executed.

If it is determined that the pseudo precursor flag is stored, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not a precursor game number update command has been received as the command at the start of this time. If the command for updating the number of precursor games has not been received and the number of remaining games in the precursor mode has not been updated in main controller 101, the process advances to step S3203 to clear (delete) the pseudo precursor flag. In the following step S3204, the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is cleared to 0. The continuous effect counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games of the continuous effect.

After execution of step S3204, the process proceeds to step S2508, and the scenario data table (effect data for continuous effect) stored in the effect setting data storage area 183c of the RAM 183 is cleared (deleted). In the following step S2509, the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared (erased), and then the continuous effect execution processing is terminated. As a result, the continuous effect being executed (the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor) is stopped.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202 (if the command for updating the number of precursor games has been received) or if a negative determination is made in step S3201 (if this precursor flag is stored), then in step S3205, the current start It is determined whether or not the second BB start command has been received as the hour command. If the second BB start command has not been received, proceed to step S3206, and based on the scenario data set in the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49), this precursor scenario corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter at that time Execute the production of the pseudo precursor scenario. In subsequent step S3207, the value of the continuous effect counter is decremented by 1, and then this continuous effect execution processing is terminated.

<Bonus production setting process>
The during-bonus effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74(b). This process is executed in step S2112 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the during-bonus effect setting process of FIG.

In the bonus effect setting process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the first BB start command or the second BB start command has been received as the command at the time of this start. When the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received, in step S3302, a process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning or the second BB winning.

In the subsequent step S3303, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type ascertained in step S3302 is set. After execution of step S3303, or when a negative determination is made in step S3301, the effect setting processing during this bonus is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, when the second BB winning is established during execution of the continuous performance for the pseudo sign and the state shifts to the second BB state, the continuous performance is not continued.

<About the flow of continuous production>
Next, the flow of the continuous effect for the main sign in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an example will be described in which the player plays the second game from the start of the continuous effect with the number of bets set to 2, and the number of remaining games in the sign mode is not updated in the game. It is assumed that the main precursor scenario H is selected as the continuous effect for the main precursor, as shown in FIG. 74(a).

When the number of remaining games in the portent mode reaches 4, the starting effect of the present portent scenario H-1 is executed as the continuous effect for the present portent (FIG. 76(a)). Then, in the second game from the start of the continuous effect, when the player plays the game with the bet number of 2, the preliminary effect is executed in the above-described first embodiment, but in the present embodiment, the above-described An item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of the present precursor scenario H-2, which is a continuation of the start effect, is executed.

After that, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3 in the third and fourth games from the start of the continuous effect, the effects (battle effects) of the precursor scenarios H-3 and H-4 are executed ( FIG. 76(b)), winning of CZ mode, etc. is reported. However, since the number of remaining games in Omen Mode is not updated in the second game from the start of the continuous effect, the number of remaining Omen Mode games will be displayed at the end of the fourth game (the game in which the winner was announced). 1.

In such a state, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3 in the fifth game from the start of the continuous effect, a standby effect is executed to make up for the surplus remaining number of games in the sign mode. be. In this embodiment, winning notification effects such as CZ mode are executed as standby effects. FIG. 76 shows a case where an AT winning notification effect (FIG. 66(a)) is executed as a winning notification effect (FIG. 76(c)). It should be noted that whether the winning notification effect corresponding to the CZ mode, the AT mode, or the addition of the number of games in the AT mode is executed depends on various winning commands (CZ winning command, AT winning command, AT addition) transmitted from the main controller 101. command) to determine the winning type, and select based on the result.

After that, when the player plays the game with the bet number of 3 in the sixth game from the start of the continuous effect, the number of remaining games in the sign mode at that time is 0, so CZ is started from the main controller 101. A command, a 1st AT winning notification command, a 2nd AT winning notification command, etc. are transmitted (FIGS. 41 and 42). The display control device 81 continues the winning notification effect to perform winning notification based on those commands (FIG. 76(d)).

Next, the flow of the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an example will be described in which the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 in the third game from the start of the continuous effect. It is also assumed that pseudo omen scenario F (continuous presentation of 4 games in which warrior character 211 appears) of FIG. 53 is selected as the continuous presentation for pseudo omen.

When the value of the effect waiting counter (FIG. 54) becomes 0, the start effect of the pseudo precursor scenario F-1 is executed as the continuous effect for the pseudo precursor (FIG. 77(a)). After that, when the player plays the game in the second game from the start of the continuous effect with the number of bets set to 3, the effect of the pseudo precursor scenario F-2 set in the scenario data table is performed as a preparatory effect (item acquisition effect). is executed (FIG. 77(b)). After that, when the player plays the game with the bet number of 2 in the third game from the start of the continuous performance, the continuous performance for the pseudo sign is stopped, and the normal performance different from the relevant performance is executed. At this time, the continuous effect is stopped at the game start timing in the third game (timing when the start lever 41 is operated with the number of bets set to 2).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for this sign, the continuous effect that is being executed is continued, and if a 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo-sign, it is executed. It was configured to stop the continuous performance in the middle.

In the above configuration, when a 2-bet game is played during execution of a continuous effect, whether or not to continue the continuous effect is switched according to the type of trigger for executing the continuous effect. Therefore, even if the player plays the 2-bet game, the continuous performance is not stopped, and if it continues as it is, the CZ mode or the like is won, and if the continuous performance is stopped, the CZ mode or the like is not won. It becomes possible to determine that As a result, it is possible to provide not only the enjoyment of the development of the continuous performance, but also the enjoyment of judging whether the continuous performance is continued or not.

If the 2-bet game extends the omen mode by one game unit, the ongoing continuous effect (continuous effect for the main omen) is continued, and the transition to the second BB state extends the omen mode over multiple games. If it is, it is configured to stop the continuous production being executed. That is, it is configured to switch whether to continue or stop the continuous effect depending on the length of the period during which the number of remaining games in the omen mode is not updated.

In this configuration, when the portent mode is extended in a short extension period during execution of the continuous performance, the continuation of the continuous performance is prioritized on the assumption that the deviation of the end of the portent mode from the execution timing of the notification of winning is within an allowable range. . On the other hand, when the sign mode is extended in a long extension period during execution of the continuous performance, the continuous performance is stopped on the assumption that the deviation cannot be ignored, and the game is forcibly terminated so that the winning notification is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to expand the chances of continuing the continuous performance and to suppress the occurrence of contradiction in performance even if the period of not shifting to the CZ mode or the like continues after the end of the performance. Therefore, it is possible to preferably cope with the event that the portent mode is extended during execution of the continuous performance as compared with the configuration in which the continuous performance is always continued or the continuous performance is always stopped.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the BB prize is established during execution of the continuous performance for the real sign, the continuous performance being executed is switched to the continuous performance for the pseudo sign. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding of the characteristic configuration, the configuration regarding the continuous presentation for the real sign and the continuous presentation for the pseudo sign is as follows. In the case where a 2-bet game is played during execution of the continuous effect for the present omen, the preliminary effect is not executed as in the third embodiment. Further, in the case of shifting to the second BB state during execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo omen, as in the first embodiment, the continuous effect is prioritized over the bonus effect, and the final game of the continuous effect ends. The continuous production will continue until it does.

<Bonus production setting process>
The effect setting process during bonus according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2112 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the during-bonus effect setting process of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 78, the same step numbers are attached to the same processing as the effect setting processing during bonus of FIG. 57, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If the determination in step S2702 is affirmative (if the first BB start command or the second BB command has been received), it is determined in step S3301 whether or not this portent flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. . This portent flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the portent mode is being executed.

When it is determined that this portent flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3302, and it is determined whether or not a continuous effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The continuous effect flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect should be executed and that the continuous effect is being executed. If the affirmative determination is made in step S3301 and the affirmative determination is made in step S3302, it means that the state has shifted to the first BB state or the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect for notifying the winning of the CZ mode or the like. In this case, in step S3303, the type of continuous effect being executed is grasped. For example, as shown in the scenario data table of FIG. 79(a), when the continuous effect of the present precursor scenario H (continuous effect of four games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is being executed, the type of the continuous effect is Understand this precursor scenario H. This scenario data table is created in step S2209 of the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49) and stored in the effect setting data storage area 183c of the RAM183.

In the subsequent step S3304, based on the value of the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, the number of remaining games of the continuous effect is grasped. Next, in step S3305, a pseudo-predictive effect table (FIG. 53) stored in various table storage areas of the ROM 182 is acquired.

After that, in step S3306, the effect data for the pseudo sign corresponding to the continuation of the continuous effect is set in the scenario data table. In the processing of this step, first, the degree of progress of the continuous effect being executed is grasped based on the type of continuous effect grasped in step S3303 and the number of remaining consecutive games grasped in step S3304. For example, if the number of games remaining in the continuous effect is 2 in the situation where the present precursor scenario H is grasped, it is grasped that the preparatory effect (item acquisition effect) of the present precursor scenario H-2 has progressed. Then, based on the pseudo-omen production table, as the production (final production) following the above preparatory production, the information of the production (battle production for the pseudo-omen) of the pseudo-omen scenarios H-3 and H-4 is set in the scenario data table. do. The information of the effects of these pseudo precursor scenarios H-3 and H-4 are set corresponding to the continuous effect counter values 2 and 1, respectively, as shown in FIG. 79(b). As a result, the scenario data table is changed so that the effects of the pseudo precursor scenarios H-3 and H-4 are executed as the effects of the third game and the fourth game of the continuous effects.

In step S3307, the value of the continuous effect counter managed during the execution of the continuous effect for the real sign is taken over as that for the continuous effect for the pseudo sign. It should be noted that this step is described for convenience of explanation, and the only processing is not to clear the value of the continuous effect counter at that time. Thereafter, in step S3308, the pseudo precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. As a result, both the real precursor flag and the pseudo precursor flag are stored in the various flag storage area 183a. After step S3308 is executed, the present bonus effect setting process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3301 (when the portent mode is not being executed) or if a negative determination is made in step S3302 (when a continuous effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S2703 to grasp the bonus type of this time. process. At subsequent step S2704, the bonus effect corresponding to the comprehended bonus type is set, and then the present bonus effect setting process is terminated.

<Continuous effect execution processing>
The continuous effect execution processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80(a). This process is executed in step S2115 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect execution process of FIG.

In the continuous effect execution processing, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM183. When it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not stored, this continuous effect execution processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag is stored, that is, if the continuous effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3302, and the value of the continuous effect counter is set based on the scenario data set at that time. The rendering of the corresponding main precursor scenario or pseudo precursor scenario is executed. For example, when the value of the effect counter becomes 1, the scenario data table is changed to the state shown in FIG. If there is, the effect of this precursor scenario H-4 is controlled to be executed, and an effect image in which the warrior character 211 wins is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 . On the other hand, if the scenario data table has been changed to the state shown in FIG. 79(b) in step S3306, the pseudo precursor scenario H-4 is controlled to be executed, and the warrior character 211 is displayed on the display screen. is displayed. After execution of step S3402, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous effect counter in step S3403, and then this continuous effect execution processing is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The flow of the all-stop effect setting process according to the present embodiment is the same as the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 56) according to the first embodiment. 80(b), the processing for the case where the continuous effect changed to the scenario for the pseudo sign ends will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80(b).

If a negative determination is made in step S2611 (if the sign end command is not received), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S2614, that is, whether or not the continuous effect has ended. . When it is determined that the value of the continuous effect counter is 0 (when the continuous effect ends), the process proceeds to step S2615 to clear (delete) the pseudo precursor flags stored in the various flag storage area 183a. As already explained, when the second BB state is started during the execution of the continuous effect for the real omen and the continuous effect for the pseudo omen is switched to, the main omen flag and the pseudo omen flag are stored in the various flag storage area 183a. is stored. By executing the processing for clearing the pseudo precursor flag in this step, only the main precursor flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a.

At step S2616, the continuous effect flag stored in the various flag storage area 183a is cleared (erased), and at the subsequent step S2617, it is determined whether or not the second BB state is being executed. When it is determined that the second BB state is being executed, the pseudo sign end flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the process proceeds to step S2621 (other effect setting process at all stop). .

When the pseudo-prediction end flag is set in this way, in the bonus medium effect setting process of FIG. . Then, in step S2707, the pseudo precursor end flag is cleared (erased), and the process proceeds to step S2703. In step S2703, processing for grasping the bonus type of this time is performed, and in subsequent step S2704, a bonus effect corresponding to the grasped bonus type is set. That is, when the continuous performance being executed is changed to the scenario for the pseudo sign with the start of the second BB state as a trigger, the bonus performance is executed after the continuous performance ends.

<Continuous production setting process>
The flow of the continuous effect setting process according to this embodiment is the same as the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49) according to the first embodiment. Processing related to the case where the 2BB state is started and then the 2BB state is ended will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80(c).

In the continuous effect setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command is received, that is, whether or not the BB state is ended. If it is determined that the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received (if the BB state has ended), the process advances to step S2215 to determine whether or not this portent flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. judge. As described above, when the continuous effect (continuous effect changed to the pseudo-scenario) ends in the middle of the second BB state, only the pseudo-prediction flag is displayed in step S2615 of the effect setting process at all stop (FIG. 80(b)). is cleared, and this precursor flag is maintained in the state stored in the various flag storage area 183a. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in this step.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2215, then in step S2207 a process of acquiring the present prognostic effect table from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182 is executed, and then the processes after step S2208 are executed. In this case, in step S2210, 0 is set as the value of the effect waiting counter (if it is already 0, the state is left as it is), and the continuous effect is set to start immediately. As a result, with the end of the second BB state, a new continuous effect is executed within the range of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode.

<About the flow of continuous production>
Next, the flow of the continuous effect for the main sign in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an example will be described in which the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2 in the second game from the start of the continuous effect, and the 2nd BB prize is established in the game. It is also assumed that, as the continuous effect for the main omen, the main omen scenario H is selected as shown in FIG. 79(a).

When the number of remaining games in the portent mode reaches 4, the start effect of the present portent scenario H-1 is executed as the continuous effect for the present portent (FIG. 81(a)). Then, in the second game from the start of the continuous effect, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2, the number of remaining games in the sign mode is not updated. The item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of this precursor scenario H-2 is executed.

During the second game, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the second BB (FIG. 13(f)) stops, the second BB prize is established, and then the second BB is won. A bonus game corresponding to the second BB is started from the game of . When the player operates the start lever 41 with the number of bets set to 3 in the third game (starting game of the bonus game) from the start of the continuous effect, the game is started, and accordingly the effect setting data storage area of the RAM 183. In the scenario data table set in 183c, the effect after the third game of the continuous effect is changed to the pseudo precursor scenario effect (FIG. 79(b)). That is, the bonus game is started by operating the start lever 41, but the bonus effect is not executed on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65, and the battle effect of the pseudo precursor scenario H-3 is executed as a continuation of the continuous effect. be done.

Further, in the above case, the precursor mode flag stored in the RAM 106 of the main controller 101 at the start of the bonus game is maintained without being cleared. Also in the display control device 81, the present precursor flag stored in the RAM 183 is not cleared and is maintained as it is. In other words, information indicating that the portent mode is on is internally held.

Then, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3 in the fourth game (the second game of the bonus game) from the start of the continuous effect, the pseudo precursor scenario H-4 set in the changed scenario data table. is executed (FIG. 81(b)). As a result, the continuous effect is completed in a state where non-winning is notified in the CZ mode or the like. After that, when the player plays the next game with the number of bets set to 3, a bonus effect is executed on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 . The bonus effect is continued until timing t1 when the second BB bonus game ends.

When the bonus game ends at timing t1 and the player starts the next game with the number of bets set to 3, the display control device 81 displays the number of remaining games in the precursor mode at that time (3 games in the example of FIG. 81). A continuous effect (continuous effect for the main sign) that can be executed within the range of is drawn, and a new system data table is created (NO in step S2201 in FIG. 80(a), step S2215, step S2207 reference). In this case, since the value of the effect standby counter is set to 0, the continuous effect set in the new system data table is executed in that game (next game after the bonus game is finished). That is, when the second BB state ends, a new continuous effect is executed within the range of the number of remaining games in the portent mode.

For example, assuming that the present precursor scenario A (continuous presentation of three games in which the girl character 201 appears) is selected as a new continuous presentation, the player starts the game with the number of bets set to 3 in the next game after the second BB state ends. If so, the effect of the precursor scenario A-1 is executed (FIG. 81(c)). Then, when the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3 in the second game and the third game from the start of the new continuous effect, the end of the precursor scenarios A-2 and A-3 set in the scenario data An effect (transformation effect) is executed (FIG. 81(d)). As a result, notification of winning such as CZ mode is performed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the state is shifted to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous performance for the present sign, the configuration is changed so that the performance mode of the continuous performance is deviated and the notification is performed.

When the second BB bonus game is entered, the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated throughout the bonus game, so the precursor mode is greatly extended. In this case, for example, if the continuous effect is continued as it is, it will lead to a situation in which the transition to the CZ mode, etc. is not performed for a long period of time even though the winning notification is performed in the effect, and the player's trust in the effect. There is concern that the Therefore, it becomes impossible to continue the continuous performance. In this regard, in this configuration, since the performance mode of the continuous performance is changed so that the failure notification is performed, the player can be made to think that the failure has occurred. Also, it is possible to suitably suppress the production contradiction. Therefore, even when the omen mode is extended in the middle of the continuous performance, the continuous performance can be continued.

When the state is shifted to the second BB state during execution of the continuous performance for the real sign, the remaining continuous performance is replaced with the continuous performance for the pseudo-sign.

This continuous production for pseudo omens (continuous production for notification of failure) is the same as continuous production for real omens (continuous production for notification of winning). By utilizing the continuous effect for the pseudo omen as the subsequent continuous effect, the continuous effect before the change and the continuous effect after the change can be connected satisfactorily. Therefore, giving an unnatural impression is suppressed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the effect mode of the continuous effect has been changed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to believe that the game is out of order, and it is possible to ensure consistency with the occurrence of a period in which the transition to the CZ mode or the like does not occur after the end of the effect. Moreover, since a part of the continuous effect for the pseudo omen is diverted, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect for change. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated effects, and furthermore it becomes possible to save the capacity of the ROM for storing the effect data.

In the above case, the configuration is such that the continuous performance for the pseudo precursor corresponding to the type of the continuous performance for the main precursor executed before the transition to the second BB state is used. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the continuous presentation for the real omen has been switched to the continuous presentation for the pseudo omen, and it is possible to suitably suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player.

Furthermore, when the transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the continuous performance for the real sign, the progress of the continuous performance is grasped, and the continuous performance for the pseudo sign corresponding to the continuation is replaced. It is possible to make it difficult to visually identify the boundaries before and after the change. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to understand that the continuous presentation for the real sign has been switched to the continuous presentation for the pseudo sign, and it is possible to suitably make the player think that the play has failed.

When the performance mode of the continuous performance is changed to the one for notification of failure due to the transition to the second BB state, the continuous performance for notifying the winner is executed after the second BB state is ended.

In the configuration in which the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed to the loss notification by the transition to the second BB state, the winning notification that should have been originally performed is canceled. Therefore, when the update of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is resumed after the second BB state, there is a concern that the player may be confused by shifting to the CZ mode or the like without being notified of the winning. In this respect, in this configuration, even when the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed to the notification of failure, the winning can be notified in the continuous effect executed after the second BB state. As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the winning, and to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

When the continuous performance is executed after the end of the second BB state, the continuous performance is executed in the number of remaining games in the sign mode. As a result, the continuous effect after the bonus game can be ended in synchronization with the end of the sign mode. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift to the CZ mode or the like after the winning notification is performed in the continuous effect after the bonus game.

When executing the continuous performance after the end of the second BB state, a new continuous performance is executed again. In this case, the continuous performance being executed at the time of transition to the second BB state (the continuous performance being executed at the time of change) is clearly distinguished from the continuous performance after the second BB state, and the player may confuse the two. Confusion can be suitably suppressed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, after the bonus game is over, a new continuous effect is executed within the range of the number of remaining games in the omen mode. can be difficult to implement. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a new continuous effect is started before the bonus game ends. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Bonus effect setting process>
The during-bonus effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S2112 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the during-bonus effect setting process of FIG. In FIG. 82, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the effect setting processing during bonus of FIG. 78, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If the determination in step S2705 is affirmative, that is, if the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the pseudo precursor end flag is stored in the flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. do. If it is determined that the pseudo portent end flag is not stored, the process advances to step S4001 to determine whether or not the number of remaining games in the portent mode at that time is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games.

The predetermined number of games in this step can be, for example, a number obtained by subtracting one game from the number of games required to execute the continuous effect, and can be two games in this embodiment. In the following description, it is assumed that the predetermined number of games is two. Further, since the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is not updated while the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed (FIG. 39), the number of remaining games in the precursor mode when executing this step is substantially the same as when the bonus game is finished. It will be the number of remaining games in the omen mode when you do.

If the number of remaining games in the portent mode is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games (two games), the process advances to step S4002 to determine whether or not the current game is the final bonus game. Whether or not it is the final game is determined by specifying a winning combination (minor combination) in the current game based on a winning result command transmitted from the main control unit 101, and determining whether or not the winning combination has won a prize. This is done by determining whether or not the number of medals to be paid out is equal to or more than the remaining number of medals up to the upper limit number of payouts (46) of the bonus game. For example, if the winning hand in this game is a common bell (the number of medals paid out at the time of winning is 13), and the remaining number of medals until the maximum number of payouts is 13 or less, the current game is a bonus game. is the final game of

If it is determined to be the final game of the bonus game, 1 is added to the number of remaining games in the precursor mode grasped in step S4002, and this is grasped as the number of consecutive effect execution games. Next, in step S4004, the production table for the present sign is acquired from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and then, in step S4005, lottery processing for continuous production is executed. In step S4005, a continuous effect that can be executed within the range of the number of games to be executed ascertained in step S4003 is executed. For example, if the number of executed games ascertained in step S4003 is 3, the main precursor scenario A or the main precursor scenario B that can be executed in 3 games among the various scenarios set in the main precursor effect table of FIG. It is decided by lottery.

After step S4005 is executed, in step S4006, a scenario data table corresponding to the production scenario determined by the lottery process is created. set the value. The continuous effect counter is for counting the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect or the number of remaining games. For example, when the number of executed games ascertained in step S4003 is 3, 3 is set as the value of the continuous effect counter. be done. In addition, in step S4007, the value of the effect standby counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is set to 0 (if it is already 0, it is left as it is), and the continuous effect is set to start immediately. The effect waiting counter is for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of waiting games until the continuous effect is started.

Through the processing of steps S4002 to S4007, the setting processing for executing the continuous effect at the start of the final game of the bonus game is executed. After step S4007 is executed, in step S4008, a pre-end start flag is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a. The pre-end start flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the continuous effect is started before the end of the bonus game.

After execution of step S4008, this processing for setting effect during bonus is terminated. If a negative determination is made in either step S4001 or step S4002 (if the number of remaining games in the portent mode is not two or less, or if the current game is not the final game of the bonus game), then step S4003 and subsequent steps are performed. Without executing the process, the effect setting process during this bonus is ended.

<Continuous production setting process>
The continuous effect setting process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83(a). This process is executed in step S2113 of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 48) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the continuous effect setting process of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 83(a), the same step number is given to the same processing as the continuous effect setting processing of FIG. 49, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In the continuous continuous output setting process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received, that is, whether or not the BB state has ended. If it is determined that the first BB end command or the second BB end command has been received (if the BB state has ended), the process advances to step S2215 to determine whether or not this portent flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. judge.

If it is determined that this precursor flag is stored, that is, if the transition to the precursor mode is made after the bonus game ends, the process proceeds to step S4101 to determine whether or not the pre-end start flag is stored in the flag storage area 183a. determine whether If it is determined that the pre-end start flag is not stored, that is, if the continuous effect (continuous effect for the main sign) is not started before the end of the bonus game, various table storage areas of the ROM 182 in step S2207. 182a to acquire the effect table for the present sign is executed, and then the processing after step S2208 is executed. That is, with the end of the second BB state, a new continuous effect is executed within the range of the number of remaining games in the precursor mode.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4101 (when the pre-end start flag is not stored), this continuous effect setting process is terminated without executing the processes after step S2207. That is, when the continuous effect is started before the bonus game ends, the continuous effect setting process at the end of the bonus game is not executed.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The effect setting process at the time of all stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83(b). This process is executed in step S1910 of the effect setting process (FIG. 47) in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process at all stop of FIG. In FIG. 83(b), the same step numbers are given to the processing similar to the effect setting processing at the time of all stop of FIG. 56, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2611 (if the portent end command has been received), that is, if the portent mode is terminated, then in steps S2612 and S2613, the flags stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 are stored. Clear (delete) the precursor flag and the continuous effect flag. In the subsequent step S4201, it is determined whether or not the start-before-end flag is stored in the flag storage area 183a. If it is determined that it is stored, the start-before-end flag is cleared ( to erase. After execution of step S4202 or when a negative determination is made in step S4201 (when the start-before-end flag is not stored), other effect setting processing at all stop of step S2621 is executed.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2614 (when the value of the continuous effect counter is not 0), in step S2619, whether or not the first BB end command or the second BB end command is received as the command at the time of all stop of this time. determine whether If it is determined that these commands have been received, the flow advances to step S4203 to determine whether or not the start before end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. When it is determined that the pre-end start flag is not stored (when the continuous effect is not started before the end of the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S2620 to set the bonus end effect. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-end start flag is stored (when the continuous effect is started before the end of the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S26212 without executing the process of step S2620. That is, when the continuous effect is started before the bonus game ends, the bonus end effect is not executed.

<About the flow of continuous production>
Next, the flow of the continuous effect for the main sign in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, an example will be described in which the player plays a game with the number of bets of 2 in the third game from the start of the continuous effect, and the 2nd BB prize is established in the game. It is also assumed that, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the main precursor scenario H (continuous production of 4 games in which the warrior character 211 appears) is selected as the continuous production for the main precursor.

Further, here, when the transition to the second BB state occurs during execution of the continuous performance, the performance is changed to the pseudo precursor scenario and the continuous performance is continuously executed, as in the fourth embodiment. do. Note that the flow of the continuous effect in this case is as described in the fourth embodiment, so the description will be omitted or simplified as appropriate.

When the number of games remaining in the omen mode reaches 4, the start effect of the main omen scenario H-1 is executed as the continuous effect for the main omen (FIG. 84(a)), and then the second game from the start of the continuous effect. When the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 3, the item acquisition effect (preparation effect) of the precursor scenario H-2 is executed.

Then, in the third game from the start of the continuous effect, the player sets the bet number to 2 in the third game from the start of the continuous effect, and in the game, the symbol combination corresponding to 2BB (Fig. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when f)) is stopped, the 2nd BB prize is established, and the bonus game corresponding to the 2nd BB is started from the next game. The number of remaining games in the omen mode is not updated in the winning game of the 2nd BB (3rd game from the start of the continuous effect and the number of bets is 2) and the start game in the bonus game corresponding to the 2nd BB. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the bonus game is started when the number of remaining games in the omen mode is two.

In this embodiment, since the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is updated at the start of the game, the bonus game is started with the number of remaining games in the precursor mode set to 3 in the description of FIG. However, the actual remaining number of games is 2 games. This is the bonus game in the state where the number of remaining games in the omen mode is 4 (the start of the continuous effect) and the state where the 3-bet game has been played twice (the state where the number of remaining games in the continuous effect is 2). is started.

After that, when the final game of the bonus game is reached at timing t1, the display control device 81 displays the number of games within the range of the number of games (3 games in the example of FIG. An executable continuous effect (continuous effect for the main sign) is drawn, and a new system data table is created (YES in step S4001, YES in step S4002, steps S4003 to S4008 in FIG. 82). In this case, since the value of the effect standby counter is set to 0, the continuous effect set in the new system data table is executed in that game (the final game of the bonus game). That is, a new continuous effect is started prior to the end of the second BB state.

For example, if this precursor scenario A (continuous production of three games in which the girl character 201 appears) is selected as a new continuous production, the production of this precursor scenario A-1 is executed in the final game of the bonus game ( FIG. 84(c)). Then, when the bonus game ends at timing t2 and the player starts the next game with the number of bets set to 3, the effect of the precursor scenario A-2 set in the scenario data is executed. After that, when the player plays the third game from the start of the new continuous effect with the number of bets set to 3, the effect of the precursor scenario A-3 is executed, and the winning of the CZ mode, etc. is notified ( FIG. 84(d)).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the continuous performance is executed using the remaining portent mode after the second BB state, the continuous performance is started before the end of the second BB state.

Depending on the timing of transition to the second BB state, the number of games remaining in the precursor mode after the end of the second BB state may be small. In this case, it may become difficult to execute the continuous effect due to the lack of the number of games. It is also conceivable to provide a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, but there is a concern that this will increase the processing load required for switching and increase the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated effect. In this regard, in this configuration, the continuous effect is started prior to the end of the second BB state, so the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect can be ensured to be larger than the actual number of remaining games. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inability to appropriately execute the continuous effect due to the lack of the number of games, the increase in the processing load associated with the dedicated effect, and the increase in the load at the time of design. It becomes possible to suitably implement a continuous effect using .

The number of remaining games in the portent mode after the end of the second BB state is referred to, and when the number of remaining games is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the continuous performance is started before the end of the second BB state.

For example, if the continuous effect is uniformly started before the end of the second BB state, there is a concern that the continuous effect will unnecessarily lengthen and give the player a sense of sluggishness. In this regard, in this configuration, the continuous effect is started early only when the number of remaining games of the number of precursor modes is insufficient. For this reason, it is possible to suitably implement the continuous effect using the number of remaining games in the portent mode after the second BB state, while preventing the period of the continuous effect from becoming unnecessarily long.

The number of remaining payouts of the bonus game of the second BB is grasped, the number of remaining games is specified from the result, and when the number of remaining games is equal to or less than a predetermined number, continuous performance is started.

In the case of starting the continuous effect before the end of the bonus game, for example, if the start timing of the continuous effect is too early, the continuous effect ends earlier than the remaining sign mode after the bonus game has passed, or vice versa. If the start timing of the continuous production is too late, the continuous production may exceed the omen mode. In this regard, in this configuration, the number of remaining games is specified (estimated) by referring to the number of remaining payouts for each bonus game, and the start timing of continuous effect is determined based on the result. As a result, the continuous performance can be started at an appropriate timing in relation to the number of remaining games in the second BB state, and the continuous performance suitable for both the number of remaining games in the second BB state and the number of remaining games in the sign mode is preferable. It will be possible to implement

Particularly, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect is started in the final game of the bonus game. In a bonus game that ends with the condition that the number of medals paid out reaches the upper limit of the number of paid out games, the number of games to be played is not unequivocally determined, but if a winning combination is won in the bonus game lottery, If the payout number of medals determined corresponding to the combination is equal to or more than the remaining payout number up to the maximum payout number, it can be specified that the game is the final game of the bonus game. In other words, although the estimation of the remaining 2 or 3 games may be less reliable, the final game can be accurately specified. Therefore, if the continuous effect is started in the final game of the bonus game, the continuous effect can be executed in a state in which one game is surely added to the number of remaining games in the sign mode. Therefore, not only can the number of games executed in the continuous effect be increased, but also the continuous effect and the sign mode can be preferably synchronized.

<Sixth Embodiment>
As already explained, the advantageous section ends when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) or the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous section MY reaches the upper limit increase number (2400). to end. In this embodiment, the ending effect is performed in accordance with the end timing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of these conditions, and the mode of execution of this ending effect is devised. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 85 to 89. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process of FIG. In FIG. 85, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the effect setting processing of FIG. 47, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If the determination in step S1905 is affirmative (if the newly received command is a start time command), a start effect setting process is executed in step S1906. Next, in step S4301, ending effect setting processing for setting the ending effect is executed, and in subsequent step S4302, ending effect execution processing for executing the set ending effect is executed. After execution of step S4302 or when a negative determination is made in step S1905 (when the newly received command is not the start command), the process advances to step S1907 to determine whether the newly received command was the stop operation command. judge.

<Ending effect setting process>
The ending effect setting process in step S4301 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86(a).

In the ending effect setting process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 stores either the first ending flag or the second ending flag. These ending flags are for the CPU 181 to grasp that the ending effect is being executed.

If it is determined that either the first ending flag or the second ending flag is stored, the ending effect setting process is terminated assuming that the ending effect has already been set. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag is stored, the process advances to step S4402 to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section.

If it is determined that it is in the advantageous interval, in step S4403, based on the number of remaining games such as AT mode, it is determined whether the current number of remaining games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) in the advantageous interval. determine whether In this step, for example, the total number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games completed in the advantageous interval), the number of remaining AT mode games, the remaining number of CZ mode games, and the remaining number of omen mode games is determined. It is determined whether or not the comprehension result is equal to or more than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section or more than the upper limit number of games. As a result, if the above total is equal to or more than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, or more than the upper limit number of games, it is determined that the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games with the current number of remaining games, and conversely, the above total is advantageous. If the number of games is less than the upper limit number of games in the section or equal to or less than the upper limit number of games, it is determined that the advantageous section does not reach the upper limit number of games with the current number of remaining games. For example, in a situation where the number of games played in the advantageous section is 1450, the number of remaining AT mode games is 50 or more. If the number of games is expected to be reached, it is determined that the current number of remaining games reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section.

In making the above determination, the display control device 81 must be able to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and the like. The main controller 101 transmits various commands indicating the information of each game at the start and end of each game, and the display controller 81 analyzes these commands, so that the display controller 81 can determine the number of games in the advantageous section and the AT mode. The configuration may be such that information such as the number of remaining games is acquired.

Alternatively, the determination in step S4403 may be performed on the main control device 101 side, and the display control device 81 may be notified of the result. For example, the main control unit 101 determines whether or not the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached within the range of the number of remaining games such as AT mode, and if it is determined that the upper limit number of games is reached, a command to that effect is displayed and controlled. It is configured to output to the device 81 .

As a result of the determination processing in step S4403, if it is determined that the advantageous section does not reach the upper limit number of games with the current number of remaining games, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the current number of remaining games reaches the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games such as AT mode.

Specifically, first, using the number of remaining games in AT mode and the expected net increase or average increase in the number of games per game in AT mode, the expected increase or decrease in medals when the remaining AT mode is completed ( Future expected increase/decrease in the number of sheets) is calculated. After that, the calculated expected increase/decrease in the number of medals is added to the actual increase/decrease in the number of medals after the start of the advantageous section (current actual increase/decrease in the number of medals). ) is greater than or equal to the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section. As a result, if the result of the addition is equal to or greater than the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section, or is greater than the upper limit increase number, it is determined that the advantageous section has reached the upper limit increase number with the current number of remaining games, and conversely, the above total is If it is less than the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval or equal to or less than the upper limit increase number, it is determined that the advantageous interval does not reach the upper limit increase number with the current number of remaining games. For example, the remaining number of games in AT mode is 30 games (the expected net increase in the number of cards per game in AT mode is about +8.04, and the expected increase in the number of remaining games is about 240). If the number of increase/decrease in the advantageous section at that time is 2160 or more, and if the player continues to play the AT mode, it is expected that the upper limit increase in the advantageous section will be reached before the end of the AT mode. , it is determined that the current number of remaining games reaches the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section.

If it is determined that the current number of remaining games does not reach the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section, the ending effect setting process is terminated without setting the ending effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section has been reached, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S4403 (if it is determined that the current number of remaining games reaches the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S4405. It is determined whether or not the current game start timing is the start timing of the ending effect. This determination is made, for example, by comparing the number of games in which the ending effect is executed (for example, 10 games) and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, and when the two values match, the timing of starting the ending effect (starting game). It is determined that

In the above case, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends due to reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section It is derived by dividing by the increased number of sheets. In this case, the fractional part of the division result may be rounded down or rounded up. For example, if the remaining number of cards up to the upper limit increase is 150, 18 games or 19 games are grasped as the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. Note that the determination processing in step S4404 may be performed on the main control device 101 side, and the result thereof may be notified to the display control device 81, as in the case of step S4403.

If it is determined in step S4405 that the game start timing of this time is not the ending effect start timing, the ending effect setting process is terminated without setting the ending effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game start timing is the ending effect start timing, the ending effect is set in step S4406.

The ending effect is a effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous interval due to reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval. Configured. In the ending effect, for example, in the auxiliary display section 65, a moving image effect is executed by an animation in which a predetermined character or the like appears. The animation effect at that time is set, for example, to repeatedly reproduce a five-minute animation video. In addition, in the final game of the ending effect, an end notification is given, for example, by displaying characters such as "Congratulations" or "END" to suggest the end of the ending effect or the advantageous section to the player.

In the subsequent step S4407, it is determined whether or not the opportunity to end the advantageous section is that the upper limit number of games has been reached. When the advantageous section ends by reaching the upper limit number of games, the first ending flag is set (stored) in the flag storage area 183a in step S4408. The first ending flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit number of games should be started or that the effect is being executed. .

On the other hand, if the advantageous interval does not end when the upper limit number of games is reached, that is, if the advantageous interval ends when the upper limit increase number is reached, the second ending is stored in the various flags storage area 183a in step S4409. Set (store) a flag. The second ending flag is for the CPU 181 to grasp that the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit increase number should be started or that the effect is being executed. . Note that the first ending effect and the second ending effect may have the same content, or may have different content.

After execution of step S4408 or step S4409, this ending effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending effect execution processing>
The ending effect execution processing in step S4302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86(b).

In the ending effect execution processing, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the first ending flag or the second ending flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. If any of these flags is stored, the process advances to step S4502 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the ending effect is executed in the current game. In this step, the above control is executed based on the setting result of step S4406 in FIG. 86(a). At that time, if the ending effect has already been executed, the ending effect will continue to be performed in this game, and if it is in the state before execution, the ending effect will start from the current game. Control.

After execution of step S4502 or when a negative determination is made in step S4501 (when neither the first ending flag nor the second ending flag is stored), this ending effect execution processing is terminated.

<Bonus effect setting process>
The effect setting process during bonus according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the during-bonus effect setting process of FIG. In FIG. 87, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as the effect setting process during bonus in FIG. 57, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702 (if the first BB start command or the second BB start command has been received as the current start command), the process proceeds to step S4601, and the first ending flag is stored in the flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. Determine whether or not it is stored. If it is determined that the first ending flag is not stored, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the second ending flag is stored in the flag storage area 183a.

If it is determined that the second ending flag is stored, that is, if the second ending flag is stored in a situation where the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the current start time command, A first BB prize or a second BB prize is established during the execution of the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit increase number, and the bonus game of the winning side of each BB state is started. means that In this case, the process advances to step S4603 to execute processing for clearing (erasing) the second ending flag. As a result, the second ending effect being executed is stopped. That is, when the second ending flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S4501 of the ending effect execution processing (FIG. 86(b)) executed thereafter, so the continuation of the second ending effect is executed. As a result, the second ending effect is canceled.

After execution of step S4603, the process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed in step S2703, and the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type is set in step S2704. That is, the setting process for starting the bonus effect is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S4602 (if the second ending flag is not stored), that is, in a situation where neither the first ending effect nor the second ending effect is being executed, the first BB state or the second BB state Also when the bonus game is started, the processing of steps S2703 and S2704 is executed, and the setting processing for starting the bonus effect is executed.

If the determination in step S4601 is affirmative (the first ending flag is stored), that is, the first ending flag is stored in a situation where the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the command at the start of this time. If so, the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize is established during the execution of the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit number of games, and the winning side of each BB state. means that the bonus game of is started. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2705 without executing the processes of steps S2703 and S2704. That is, when the first BB or second BB bonus game is started during execution of the first ending effect, the first ending effect is continued and the bonus effect is not started.

In step S2705, it is determined whether or not the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed. If any of these BB states is being executed, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not a pseudo precursor end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If it is determined that the pseudo precursor end flag is not stored, the flow advances to step S4604 to determine whether or not the end flag during BB is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. The end flag during BB is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the first ending effect has ended during execution of the first BB state or the second BB state.

When it is determined that the end flag during BB is not stored, the effect setting processing during this bonus is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end flag during BB is stored, processing for clearing (erasing) the end flag during BB is executed in step S4605, and then the process proceeds to step S2703. That is, when the first ending effect is continued even after the transition to the bonus game, the bonus effect is started after the ending effect is finished.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The effect setting process at the time of all stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88 . This process is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting process at the time of all stop of FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2619 (if the 1st BB end command or the 2nd BB end command has not been received as the current all-stop command), the flow advances to step S4701 to store the first ending flag in the flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. is stored. When the first ending flag is stored, that is, when the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit number of games is being executed, in step S4702, the current game is executed. It is determined whether or not the game should end the first ending effect. In this step, the above determination is made by referring to whether or not the current game is the end game of the advantageous interval (in other words, whether or not the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval is 0). If the game is the end game of the advantageous section, it is determined that the current game should end the first ending effect.

When it is determined that the current game is a game in which the ending effect should be ended, the process of clearing (erasing) the first ending flag is executed in step S4703. This completes the ending effect. That is, when the first ending flag is cleared at the end of the game to end the first ending effect, step S4501 of the ending effect execution processing (FIG. 86(b)) executed at the start of the next game. will be judged negative. In this case, since the first ending effect is not executed in that game, the first ending effect ends as a result.

After execution of step S4703, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed. If it is determined that the first BB state or the second BB state is being executed, the process advances to step S4705 to set (store) the end flag during BB in the various flag storage area 183a. After execution of step S4705 or when a negative determination is made in step S4704 (neither the first BB state nor the second BB state is being executed), the process advances to step S2621 to execute other all-stop effect setting processing.

When a negative determination is made in step S4702 (when it is determined that the current game is not a game that should end the first ending effect), the first ending effect being executed is continued, and the processing of steps S4703 to S4705 is performed. is not executed, the process proceeds to step S2621.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701 (if the first ending flag is not stored), the flow advances to step S4706 to determine whether or not the second ending flag is stored in the flag storage area 183a. When the second ending flag is stored, that is, when the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit increase number is being executed, in step S4707, the current game is executed. It is determined whether or not the game should end the second ending effect. Note that the specific processing for this determination is the same as in step S4702.

When it is determined that the current game is a game in which the second ending effect should be ended, a process of clearing (erasing) the second ending flag is executed in step S4708. As a result, the second ending effect ends. After execution of step S4708 or when a negative determination is made in step S4707 (when it is determined that the current game is not a game in which the second ending effect should be ended), the process proceeds to step S2621 to perform other effect setting processing at all stop. Run.

<Flow of ending production>
Next, the flow of the ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the case where the 2nd BB prize is established in the middle of the ending effect (the case of shifting to the 2nd BB state) will be described as an example.

First, referring to FIG. 89(a), the case where the 2nd BB prize is established in the middle of the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to the reaching of the upper limit number of games will be described.

At the timing t1 in the advantageous section, when the start timing of the first ending effect is reached, the first ending effect is started. After that, in the game in which the first ending effect is being executed, the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2, and when the player wins the 2nd BB prize in the game, the bonus game in the 2nd BB state starts from the next game. (timing t2).

Here, in the present embodiment, if the transition to the bonus game occurs in the middle of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval does not end. It is configured to count the number of games played (the number of games in the advantageous section AG) (see FIG. 45). Therefore, even when shifting to the second BB state during execution of the first ending performance, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section does not change, and the number of remaining games is the same as when the second BB state is not shifted. Based on this point, in the present embodiment, even when the bonus game is started, the first ending effect that is being executed is continued (timing t2).

After that, when the number of games played during the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous interval ends (timing t3), the first ending effect is terminated. At that time, in the final game of the first ending effect, an end notification with characters such as "Congratulations" is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the first ending effect is ended by completely matching the end timing of the advantageous section. Depending on the game pace of the player, ending the ending effect at the end timing of the advantageous section may result in a bad break in the effect. Therefore, the end timing of the first ending effect may be slightly (for example, about 2 or 3 games) before or after the end timing of the advantageous section.

After the end of the first ending effect, the bonus effect corresponding to the second BB is executed. In other words, when the transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the first ending effect, the first ending effect is given priority to delay the start of the bonus effect, and the bonus effect is started after the first ending effect is completed. It is configured. After that, when the bonus game ends at timing t4, the bonus effect started at timing t3 ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 89(b), the case where the 2nd BB prize is established during the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit increase number will be described.

At timing t11 in the advantageous section, when the start timing of the second ending effect comes, the second ending effect is started. After that, in the game in which the second ending effect is being executed, the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2, and when the player wins the 2nd BB prize in the game, the bonus game in the 2nd BB state starts from the next game. (timing t12).

As already explained, the net increase in the number of cards per game in the AT mode is about +8.04, while the net increase in the number of cards per game in the 2BB state is about minus 0.96. . That is, by shifting to the second BB state, the state in which the number of medals increases greatly changes to the state in which the number of medals gradually decreases. On the other hand, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (the number of games played until reaching the upper limit increase number) referred to when determining the start timing (start game) of the second ending effect is the medal before the transition to the second BB state. It is grasped (estimated) based on the rate of increase of

Therefore, the transition to the second BB state changes the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval, and the end timing of the advantageous interval deviates from the timing estimated at the start of the second ending effect. The number of remaining games will increase, and the end timing of the advantageous section will be delayed). In this case, in the present embodiment, the continuation of the second ending effect is not executed, and the second ending effect being executed is forcibly terminated. That is, the second ending effect is ended in the middle without executing the end notification (timing t12).

Also, at timing t2 when the bonus game is started, a bonus effect corresponding to the second BB is started. In other words, when the state is shifted to the second BB state while the second ending effect is being executed, the second ending effect is stopped and the bonus effect is started. Then, when the bonus game ends at timing t13, the bonus effect started at timing t12 ends. Even if the bonus game ends, the second ending effect is not restarted.

After the bonus game is over, the mode shifts to the AT mode and the number of medals increases again. At timing t14, when the number of increased medals in the advantageous section (the number of increased or decreased number of advantageous sections MY) reaches the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section ends. do. At that time, the end notification is not executed because the second ending effect has already been canceled.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The second ending performance being executed is stopped when the second ending performance is shifted to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending performance corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit increase number.

Since the AT mode during the advantageous interval is a gaming state in which medals are likely to increase, the advantageous interval is likely to end during the AT mode due to reaching the upper limit increase number. For this reason, the second ending effect, which is performed in response to the end of the advantageous section due to the reaching the upper limit increase number, is also likely to be performed during the AT mode. On the other hand, in the second BB state, the net increase in number of medals per game is a negative value, and the number of medals decreases. Therefore, when the state is shifted to the second BB state in the middle of the second ending effect performed in the AT mode, the increase rate of medals turns negative, and the number of remaining games until reaching the upper limit increase number greatly increases. As a result, the end game of the advantageous section is significantly delayed, which may cause inconvenience that the advantageous section does not end easily even though the second ending effect has been performed to the end. In this regard, in this configuration, when the second BB state is entered while the second ending effect is being executed, the second ending effect being executed is stopped, so that the ending effect can be avoided from being performed to the end. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion due to the ending effect and the advantageous section not being synchronized.

When the game machine shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit number of games, the first ending effect being executed is continued.

For example, when the transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the ending effect, if the ending effect is always stopped, the ending effect may be interrupted frequently. In this respect, in this configuration, when the transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the first ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is continued. When the advantageous interval ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval AG) reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending game of the advantageous interval changes even if a transition to the second BB state occurs in the middle of the advantageous interval. no. Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the ending effect is interrupted while synchronizing the ending effect with the advantageous section.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the second ending performance is shifted to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending performance, the second ending performance is not uniformly stopped, but is configured to be stopped or continued. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

Here, the relationship between the number of remaining games until reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval and the number of remaining games until reaching the upper limit number of games of the advantageous interval will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, it is assumed that the number of remaining games until reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval is less than the remaining number of games until reaching the upper limit number of games of the advantageous interval. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(a), the timing (timing t1) for reaching the upper limit increase number comes before the timing (timing t2) for reaching the upper limit number of games, and the upper limit number of games is reached. It will reach the upper limit increase number faster than.

In such a situation, as shown in FIG. 90(b), if the state is shifted to the second BB state at the timing t11 before reaching the upper limit increase number, the number of medals does not increase during the second BB state. The increase number (advantage section increase/decrease number MY) is prevented from increasing. As a result, the number of games played (remaining games) required to reach the upper limit increase number increases, and the timing of reaching the upper limit increase number is delayed. The timing to reach the upper limit increase number is delayed by the minute). On the other hand, the number of games played in the advantageous interval (advantageous interval game number AG) is counted regardless of whether the bonus game is in progress. , the upper limit number of games may be reached earlier than the upper limit increase number is reached (timing t12).

In the present embodiment, considering that the above-described reversal phenomenon may occur, if the transition to the second BB state occurs during execution of the second ending effect, it is determined whether to continue or cancel the ending effect. I am trying to switch. The configuration for that purpose will be described in detail below.

<Bonus effect setting process>
The during-bonus effect setting process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the during-bonus effect setting process of FIG. In FIG. 91, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the effect setting processing during bonus in FIG. 87, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S4601 (if the first ending flag is not stored), the process advances to step S4602 to determine whether or not the second ending flag is stored in the flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. If it is determined that the second ending flag is stored, that is, if the second ending flag is stored in a situation where the first BB start command or the second BB start command is received as the current start time command, A first BB prize or a second BB prize is established during the execution of the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit increase number, and the bonus game of the winning side of each BB state is started. means that In this case, the process advances to step S5101 to grasp the remaining number of games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section.

In the following step S5102, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section grasped in step S5101 is smaller than a predetermined number of games. In this case, the predetermined number of games is equal to or less than the number of games executed in the first BB state or the second BB state. In the present embodiment, only the second BB state, out of the first BB state and the second BB state, can be shifted to the advantageous interval. Use numbers.

Here, as already described, the second BB state according to the present embodiment is configured to end on condition that the number of medals to be paid out during the BB state reaches the upper limit number of payouts (46). The number of games from the start to the end of the game is not uniquely defined. Therefore, as the number of games to be executed in the second BB state, the expected number of games to be executed or the average number of actual results is used. For example, when the expected number of games to be executed is 30 games, 30 games are used as the predetermined number of games in this embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, in step S5102, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached during execution of the bonus game.

In addition, since the second BB state is a bonus game in which medals are reduced, if the transition to the second BB state occurs in the middle of the advantageous section, at least the number of games executed in the second BB state up to the upper limit increase number will be increased. The number of remaining games will increase. In other words, the determination in step S5102 (determining whether or not the number of remaining games of the upper limit number of games is equal to or less than the number of executed games in the second BB state) is also the determination of whether or not the reversal phenomenon will substantially occur. ing.

If it is determined in step S5102 that the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (if the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval is not reached during execution of the bonus game), the process proceeds to step S5103. A process of clearing (erasing) the second ending flag is executed. As a result, the second ending effect being executed is stopped. After execution of step S5103, the process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed in step S2703, and the bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type is set in step S2704. That is, the setting process for starting the bonus effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5102 that the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval is smaller than the predetermined number of games (if the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval is reached during execution of the bonus game), step S5104. to set (store) a continuation flag in the various flag storage area 183a. After that, the effect setting process during the bonus is ended without executing the processes of steps S2703 and S2704. That is, the second ending effect being executed is continued, and the bonus effect is not started. In addition, the continuation flag of step S5104 is a flag for CPU181 to grasp having continued the 2nd ending production.

If a negative determination is made in step S2706 (if the pseudo precursor end flag is not stored), the flow advances to step S5105 to determine whether or not the end flag during BB is stored in the flag storage area 183a. The end flag during BB is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the first ending effect or the second ending effect has ended during execution of the first BB state or the second BB state.

If it is determined that the end flag during BB is stored, processing for clearing (erasing) the end flag during BB is executed in step S5106, and then the process proceeds to step S2703. That is, when the first ending effect or the second ending effect is continued even after shifting to the bonus game, the bonus effect is started after the ending effect is finished.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
The effect setting process at the time of all stop according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 92 . This processing is executed in the display control device 81, and is executed in place of the effect setting processing at all stop of FIG. In FIG. 92, the same step numbers are given to the same processing as the effect setting processing at the time of all stop of FIG. 88, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701 (if the first ending flag is not stored), the flow advances to step S5201 to determine whether or not the second ending flag is stored in various flag storage area 183a of RAM183. When it is determined that the second ending flag is not stored, the present all-stop effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second ending flag is stored, the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit increase number is being executed, or the effect during bonus is set. It is determined in step S5102 of the process (FIG. 91) that the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games is less than the predetermined number of games, and the second ending effect is continued even after the shift to the bonus game. means. In this case, the process advances to step S5202 to determine whether or not a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If it is determined that the continuation flag is not stored, that is, if the advantageous section ends when the upper limit increase number is reached, the number of remaining games until the upper limit increase number is reached is grasped in step S5202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuation flag is stored, that is, if the second ending effect is continued even after the shift to the bonus game, the number of remaining games until reaching the maximum number of games is grasped in step S5204. do.

After step S5203 or step S5204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5205, the number of remaining games grasped in each step is referred to, and the current game is a game that should end the second ending effect being executed or being continued. Determine whether or not That is, in the case of the second ending effect that is executed in response to the end of the advantageous interval due to reaching the upper limit increase number, if the current game is a game that reaches the upper limit increase number of the advantageous interval, the ending In the case of the second ending effect that is determined to be the end game of the effect and continued after the shift to the bonus game, the end game of the ending effect when the current game reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. is determined to be

When it is determined that the current game is not a game in which the second ending effect should be ended, the present effect setting processing at the time of all stop ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game is a game in which the second ending effect should be ended, the process of clearing (erasing) the second ending flag is executed in step S5206. As a result, the second ending effect being executed or continued ends.

In the subsequent step S5207, it is determined whether or not a continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 183a. If it is determined that the continuation flag is stored, processing for clearing (erasing) the continuation flag is executed in step S5208. In the subsequent step S5209, the end flag during BB is set (stored) in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the effect setting process at the time of all stop ends. If a negative determination is made in step S5207 (if the continuation flag is not stored), the effect setting process at all stop ends without executing the processes in steps S5208 and S5209.

<Flow of ending production>
Next, the flow of the ending effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the case where the 2nd BB prize is established (the case of shifting to the 2nd BB state) during the 2nd ending effect (ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit increase number) will be explained as an example. do. It should be noted that the flow in the case where the 2nd BB prize is established during the first ending effect (ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to reaching the upper limit number of games) is the same as in the case of the sixth embodiment. It is the same.

At the timing t1 in the advantageous section, when the start timing of the second ending effect comes, the second ending effect is started. After that, in the game in which the second ending effect is being executed, the player plays the game with the number of bets set to 2, and when the player wins the 2nd BB prize in the game, the bonus game in the 2nd BB state starts from the next game. (timing t2).

At this time, the number X of remaining games in the advantageous section up to the maximum number of games is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the number X of remaining games is less than a predetermined number of games (30 games). For example, when the number X of remaining games is smaller than the predetermined number of games, the ending effect being executed is continued. That is, when the number of upper limit games is reached during the bonus game and the advantageous section ends, in other words, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number after shifting to the bonus game increases, and the second ending effect ends. Although the timing and the timing of reaching the upper limit increase number are different, if the difference can be absorbed by the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the bonus game, the ending performance being executed is not stopped.

In this case, as the continuing ending effect, the effect following the second ending effect when the second BB winning is established is executed. For example, in the case where the second ending effect is configured such that an animation video of 5 minutes is repeatedly reproduced, the reproduction is continued as it is.

After that, when the number of games played in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous interval ends (timing t3), the continuous second ending effect is terminated. At that time, in the final game of the second ending effect, an end notification with characters such as "Congratulations" is displayed. After the second ending effect is completed, a bonus effect corresponding to the second BB is executed.

On the other hand, when the number of remaining games X is larger than the predetermined number of games, the continuation of the second ending effect is not executed, and the second ending effect being executed is forcibly terminated. That is, if the upper limit number of games is not reached during the bonus game and the advantageous section is not ended, the difference between the end timing of the second ending effect and the timing of reaching the upper limit increase number cannot be absorbed in the bonus game. As in the sixth embodiment, the second ending effect being executed is stopped. In this case, the bonus effect is executed in accordance with the start of the bonus game corresponding to the second BB state.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the second ending effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section due to the reaching of the upper limit increase number, the remaining games up to the upper limit number of games are determined as to whether or not to stop the ending effect. It is configured to determine by referring to the number.

As described in the sixth embodiment, if the end game of the advantageous section is greatly delayed during the ending effect, the ending effect and the advantageous section are not synchronized by canceling the ending effect. It is preferable to suppress confusion among users. However, there is also a demand to reduce the chances of stopping as much as possible in order to induce the player's excitement and joy by showing the ending effect to the end. In this regard, in this configuration, when the second BB state is entered during execution of the second ending effect, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games is referred to instead of uniformly stopping the ending effect. As a result of the increase in the number of remaining games, when the upper limit number of games is reached first (when a reversal phenomenon occurs), the second ending effect being executed is not stopped. As a result, even when the player establishes the second BB prize during the execution of the second ending effect, the opportunity to continue the second ending effect is ensured, and the frequency of stopping the effect can be reduced. become.

When the second ending effect is continued, the ending effect is terminated when the upper limit number of games is reached. In this configuration, when the ending effect is continued for the reason of the reversal phenomenon, the termination condition of the ending effect is changed to correspond to the upper limit number of games. Therefore, the continued second ending effect can be terminated in accordance with the end of the advantageous section, and the ending effect can be preferably synchronized with the advantageous section.

The number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the case of shifting to the second BB state during execution of the second ending effect is grasped, and only when the remaining number of games is equal to or less than the number of executed games in the second BB state, the second ending is performed. It was configured to continue the production. That is, instead of expanding the range of continuation to the case where a reversal phenomenon occurs after the end of the second BB state, the configuration is such that the second ending effect is continued only when the advantageous section ends in the second BB state. . As a result, it is possible to expand opportunities for continuing the ending effect while suppressing excessive extension of the execution period of the ending effect.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

(1) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when the 2-bet game is played, the omen mode is extended by one game, but conditions other than the 2-bet game are met. By doing so, the sign mode may be extended. Moreover, when the conditions for extending the omen mode are satisfied, the configuration may be such that the extension for a plurality of games is generated.

(2) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, after the precursor mode ends, the configuration is such that a transition to the AT mode is made by winning the AT mode transition trigger role, but the above transition trigger role is not provided. , the transition to the AT mode may be made when the portent mode ends.

(3) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when a 2-bet game is played during the omen mode, the omen counter is not updated. It is sufficient that the omen counter is not updated at least when the 2-bet game is played during execution of the continuous effect, such as the omen counter is updated even if the 2-bet game is played before.

(4) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when the CZ mode or the like is won, the continuous effect for the present sign is always executed, but when the CZ mode or the like is won, the continuous effect is executed The configuration may be such that when the lottery is won, the continuous effect for the present sign is executed. Further, the continuous effect for the pseudo omen is not limited to the configurations of the above-described first to fifth embodiments. is performed, and if the lottery is lost, the continuous performance for the pseudo sign may be always performed.

(5) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, in the continuous effect, the effect progresses in units of one game, but the effect may progress in units of a plurality of games.

(6) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, the winning notification is performed in the final game of the continuous effect, but the winning notification may be performed in the middle of the continuous effect. In this case, it may be configured to shift to the CZ mode or the like after the end of the continuous effect, or to shift to the CZ mode or the like before the end of the continuous effect (continuous effect continues even if the CZ mode or the like is started). good too.

(7) In the first to fifth embodiments, the number of remaining games in the omen mode is updated at the start of the game. good.

(8) In the first to fifth embodiments, when the number of remaining games in the portent mode is updated on the main control device 101 side, the command for updating the number of portent games is output to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 is configured to recognize that the number of precursor games has not been updated based on the fact that the command is not output. Then, a command indicating that the number of remaining games will not be updated (forecast game number non-update command) may be output to notify the display control device 81 that the number of precursor games will not be updated. This is the same for the CZ mode, and when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is not updated on the main controller 101 side, a command indicating that the number of remaining games will not be updated (CZ game number non-update command) is output. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(9) In the first to fifth embodiments, a command indicating the number of remaining games may be sent to the display control device 81 during the precursor mode. According to such a configuration, even if the number of remaining games recognized by the display control device 81 side deviates for some reason, the deviation can be appropriately corrected. Therefore, in a configuration in which the portent mode is not updated in some cases, the main controller 101 and the display control device 81 can better match the recognition of the number of remaining games in the portent mode. The command indicating the number of remaining games may be output together with the precursor game number update command and the precursor game number non-update command (the remaining game number information may be output in the precursor game number update command and the precursor game number non-update command ) or output separately from those commands.

(10) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when the continuous performance for the main sign is stopped due to the transition to the second BB state, a new continuous performance for the main sign is executed after the second BB state. However, after the second BB state, the continuation of the interrupted continuous effect may be continued with the number of remaining games in the portent mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to announce the winning in the continuous performance at the time of resuming. In addition, since it is avoided that the continuous performance ends in the middle, for example, when the execution frequency of the premium performance is low and the continuous performance is of high value for the player, the continuous performance is shown to the end. becomes possible.

In the case of resuming the continuous performance, for example, when the transition to the second BB state occurs or when the second BB prize is established, information indicating the type of continuous performance that has been stopped and the progress of the continuous performance Information indicating the condition (for example, the value of the continuous effect counter) is held (stored), and after the second BB state ends, the continuous effect is executed based on the information. In this case, the number of remaining games in the portent mode after the end of the second BB state may be grasped, but the number of remaining games in the continuous effect (the number of games in which the continuous effect is executed) is the number of remaining games in the portent mode. Since it corresponds to , it is not necessary to re-know the number of remaining games in the omen mode.

(11) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, it is possible to switch whether or not to execute the continuous effect after the end of the second BB state according to the number of remaining games in the portent mode after the end of the second BB state. good too. For example, if the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the minimum number of games (three games for the first to fourth embodiments and two games for the fifth embodiment) in which continuous effects can be executed, the second BB state A later continuous effect is executed, and if the number of games is less than the minimum number of games, the continuous effect after the second BB state may not be executed.

It should be noted that switching whether or not to execute the continuous effect after the end of the second BB state is not limited to using the number of remaining games in the sign mode after the end of the second BB state as a criterion for determination. It may also be possible for the player to select using

(12) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when the continuous effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, the continuous effect is executed in a predetermined number of games during the second BB state or before the end of the second BB state. It is also possible to provide a notification indicating that the game is on standby or on hold (for example, a notification that displays characters such as "waiting for continuous effect"). According to such a configuration, even if the continuous effect is stopped while the right or wrong is not clear due to the transition to the second BB state, and the bonus effect is executed, the game can be prevented from being re-executed afterward. can be recognized by As a result, it is possible to eliminate the player's anxiety that the winning of the CZ mode or the like may be canceled by establishing the 2nd BB prize, for example, and the player can feel relieved to win the 2nd BB. It becomes possible to advance the bonus game.

(13) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when a continuous effect is executed after the end of the second BB state, it is possible to switch between executing a new continuous effect and executing a subsequent continuous effect. may be For example, the configuration is such that the above switching is performed depending on the type of continuous effect being executed at the time of transition to the second BB state. In this case, when the continuous performance being executed at the time of transition to the second BB state is a continuous performance having a relatively high frequency of execution, a new continuous performance is executed after the second BB state ends, while the transition to the second BB state is made. If the continuous performance currently being executed is a performance with a low execution frequency such as a premium performance, the continuous performance is executed after the second BB state is finished. According to such a configuration, while suppressing the fact that the highly rare continuous performance is not seen until the middle due to the transition to the second BB state, the normal continuous performance that is not expected to attract such interest is canceled. It is possible to clarify the distinction between the continuous performance executed before and the continuous performance after the second BB state, and to suppress the player's confusion caused by confusing the two.

It should be noted that switching between execution of a new continuous effect and execution of a subsequent continuous effect is not limited to the above, and may be selected by the player using the effect switch 66 or the like, for example.

(14) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, when executing a specific effect after the end of the second BB state, the type of continuous effect is selected at random. A configuration may be adopted in which a continuous performance of a type different from the continuous performance being executed is set to be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to further clarify the distinction between the continuous performance executed before the stop and the continuous performance after the second BB state.

(15) In the above-described first to fifth embodiments, both the winning notification and the transition to the special state (CZ mode, etc.) are on standby due to the transition to the omen mode. It may be configured such that only is on standby. For example, even if only the winning notification is on standby, the timing of the winning notification recognized by the main controller 101 side and the display control device 81 side are recognized by extending the omen mode triggered by the two-bet game. It is expected that each of the above-described embodiments will effectively function as a countermeasure against such an event.

(16) In the above-described first and second embodiments, when a 2-bet game is played during execution of the continuous effect in the omen mode, the preliminary effect is executed, but the continuous effect is executed during the CZ mode. , and a preliminary effect may be executed when a 2-bet game is played during execution of the continuous effect. In the configuration where winning notification is performed at the end of the CZ mode, or transition to the AT mode after the end of the CZ mode, the CZ mode functions as a waiting period like the omen mode, so a 2-bet game is performed during the CZ mode. When an event occurs in which the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is not updated, the continuous effect and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode are not synchronized. It is expected that each of the above embodiments will effectively function as a countermeasure against such events. The continuous effect during the CZ mode may be common to the continuous effect during the omen mode, or may be exclusive for the CZ mode.

(17) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the configuration is such that the preliminary effect is executed by the same effect means as the effect means (auxiliary display section 65) that executes the continuous effect. It is good also as composition which performs preliminary production.

(18) In the above-described first and second embodiments, when a 2-bet game is played during execution of a continuous effect, the preliminary effect is inserted in the middle of the continuous effect. It may be configured to be executed by replacing with the middle production. For example, in a situation where the effect of the present precursor scenario H-2 is scheduled to be executed in the second game from the start of the continuous effect, the effect of the preliminary precursor scenario H-2 is executed when a 2-bet game is played. Then, when a 3-bet game is played in the third game after that, the next precursor scenario H-3 may be produced for the precursor scenario H-2.

(19) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the effect data (image data) for the preliminary effect for one game is set to data smaller in capacity than the effect data (image data) for one game for the continuous effect. good too. In this case, since the data for the preliminary effect can be kept small, it is possible to save the storage capacity of the storage means for storing the effect data. The preliminary effect is a preliminary effect when the omen mode is extended, and is basically a effect that is not executed. It is possible to suppress the pressure on the storage area of the performance data. In addition, by reducing the data volume of the preliminary performance, it is possible to read out in a short time, and it is a preferable aspect in terms of the nature of the preliminary performance that is suddenly executed due to the extension of the sign mode during the execution of the continuous performance. Become.

(20) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the preliminary effect setting process is performed in the same game as the continuous effect setting process, and is performed in the game prior to the game in which the preliminary effect is executed. The setting process of the effect may be performed in the game in which the effect is to be executed (in other words, the game in which the 2-bet game is played).

In addition, in the above-described first and second embodiments, the preliminary effect setting process is performed in advance. Decompression processing (expansion) may be performed in advance. In this case, it is not necessary to pre-decompress all the effect data of the preliminary effect. ), some of the effect data may be pre-decompressed.

(21) In the above-described first and second embodiments, when a 2-bet game is played during execution of the continuous effect for the pseudo omen, the preliminary effect is not executed, but the preliminary effect is executed. may be In this case, it is possible to suppress the fact that the winning state is known in advance by the presence or absence of the preliminary effect, and it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the end of the continuous effect for a long time.

(22) In the above-described first and second embodiments, configurations of both embodiments may be combined. Specifically, the preliminary effect may be executed in the game in which the 2-bet game is played and in the game after the game in which the 2-bet game is played. . For example, depending on the progress of the continuous effect (how many games have been played since the start of the continuous play, etc.), whether the preliminary effect is executed in the game in which the 2-bet game is played, or in the game in which the 2-bet game is played It may be configured to switch whether to execute the preliminary effect in a later game. According to this, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the preliminary performance is executed immediately when the timing of the break in the flow of the continuous performance is good, and the preliminary performance is postponed in favor of the continuous performance when the timing is bad. can. Further, the above switching is performed according to the type of continuous effect, for example, in the case of the first continuous effect, the preliminary effect is executed in the game in which the 2-bet game was played, and in the case of the second continuous effect, the 2-bet game is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the preliminary effect is executed in a game after the game in which the player is defeated.

The switching between executing the preliminary effect in the game in which the 2-bet game is played and executing the preliminary effect in the game after the game in which the 2-bet game is played is not limited to the above. It may be possible for the player to make a selection using the effect switch 66 or the like.

(23) In the above-described first and second embodiments, the continuous effect may not be executed after the end of the second BB state. In this case, after the end of the second BB state, a confirmation effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 66(a)) may be executed to inform the player that the game has been won, and a waiting state for shifting to the AT mode or the like may be established.

(24) In the above-described first and second embodiments, when the transition to the second BB state is made during execution of the continuous performance for this precursor, it is possible to switch between stopping and continuing the continuous performance being executed. configuration. For example, depending on the type of continuous effect being executed, it may be configured to switch whether to stop or continue the continuous effect, or to allow the player to select using the effect switch 66 or the like.

(25) In the above-described first embodiment, different types of preliminary effects are executed according to the type and progress of continuous effects. may be configured to execute

(26) In the above-described first embodiment, a dedicated effect is provided as a preliminary effect. A cut-in video displayed on the screen, etc.) may be used. In this case, it is possible to execute a preliminary effect highly related to the continuous effect while suppressing an increase in the amount of data associated with the preliminary effect.

(27) In the first embodiment, the scenario data table for the preliminary effect is stored in the same storage means (RAM 183) as the scenario data table for the continuous effect, but the scenario data table for the continuous effect is stored in a different storage means. It may be configured to be stored.

(28) In the first embodiment, the preliminary effect is executed each time the 2-bet game is played. A configuration may be adopted in which the preliminary effect is executed when the number of games has reached 2 times or 2 games or more, and the preliminary effect is not executed when the number is less than a predetermined number. Also, each time the number of 2-bet games reaches a predetermined number, one preliminary effect may be executed. According to these configurations, although a slight deviation may occur between the continuous effect and the ending game of the omen mode, if the deviation is within the allowable range, the progress of the continuous effect is prioritized, and the preliminary effect is performed. Interruptions in continuous performance can be reduced.

(29) In the above-described first embodiment, the scenario data table is configured such that the information of the preliminary precursor scenario is set in association with the value of the continuation counter. information such as the first production, the second production, etc.) and each production during the continuous production (for example, the main precursor scenario H-2 in association with the main precursor scenario H-2). good too.

(30) In the above-described second embodiment, as a preliminary effect, the effect of the main precursor scenario H-battle, which consists of one game, is repeated for the number of extended games of the precursor mode, but the length (the number of games) A plurality of preliminary effects having different lengths may be prepared, and a preliminary effect having a length corresponding to the number of extended games of the omen mode may be selected and executed from among these preliminary effects.

(31) In the above-described second embodiment, only one kind of production of this preliminary precursor scenario H-battle is provided as a preliminary production. A plurality of types of preliminary performances are prepared, such as the character 212 attacking, the warrior character 211 and the enemy character 212 facing each other in a state of matching, and the like, and these preliminary performances are extended for the number of games in the omen mode. It is good also as a structure which combines and performs by the number of.

(32) In the formation of the second embodiment, if a 2-bet game is played during execution of the continuous effect, the effect mode of the continuous effect may be changed so as to perform the resurrection effect. For example, when a continuous effect is set with the number of games to be executed being 4, if a 2-bet game is played during the continuous effect, a loss notification effect (defeat) will be given in the fourth game from the start of the continuous effect. Effect, transformation failure effect) is executed, and winning notification (success effect, transformation success effect) is executed in the next game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect while avoiding contradiction with the result of the lottery, and to cope with the delay in shifting to the CZ mode or the like.

It should be noted that, depending on the number of 2-bet games, a configuration may be adopted in which switching is made between changing the effect mode of the continuous effect being executed to the resurrection effect or inserting the preliminary effect. For example, when the number of 2-bet games from the start of the continuous effect to the predetermined game is 1 (when the sign mode is extended by 1 game), the change to the resurrection effect is performed, and the number of 2-bet games is 2. In the above case (when the omen mode is extended by two games or more), it is preferable to insert the preliminary effect as described in the second embodiment.

(33) In the above-described second embodiment, it is also possible to switch whether or not to perform the preliminary effect in accordance with the number of 2-bet games counted by the preliminary effect counter (the number of extended games in the omen mode). good. Specifically, if the number of extended games in the omen mode is less than a predetermined number (for example, one game), the preliminary effect may not be executed, and if the number of extended games is greater than the predetermined number, the preliminary effect may be executed. . In other words, when the extension of the omen mode is within the allowable range, the continuation of the continuous performance may be prioritized and the preliminary performance may not be executed.

(34) In the third and fourth embodiments, the preliminary effect is not executed when the 2-bet game is played during the execution of the continuous effect for the main sign. It is good also as a structure which performs a preliminary|backup production|presentation like form and 2nd Embodiment.

(35) In the above-described third embodiment, the AT winning notification effect (confirmed effect) of FIG. 66(a) is executed as the standby effect after the continuous effect. An effect other than the fixed effect may be executed, such as a notification or effect that allows the player to recognize something.

(36) In the above-described third embodiment, at least the number of waiting games (the number of remaining games in the portent mode) may be notified so that the player can recognize it. In this case, for example, the number of remaining games indicated by the notification may decrease each time the number of remaining games is updated, such as by performing a countdown display. Note that the notification may be performed during the continuous performance, or may be performed after the continuous performance is completed. However, in the former configuration, it becomes clear that it is a real sign (that is, that it is in a winning state) before the end of the continuous effect, so it is necessary to maintain the player's expectation until the end of the continuous effect. Then, the latter configuration is preferable.

(37) In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the transition to the second BB state is made during execution of the continuous effect for the real sign, the subsequent continuous effect is changed to the continuous effect for the pseudo sign. It is not necessarily necessary to change all the continuous effects after the transition to the second BB state to the continuous effects for the pseudo aura. Alternatively, a part of the final stage (part of the final game of the continuous production) may be changed to a pseudo sign.

(38) In the above-described fourth embodiment, if the transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the continuous performance for the real sign, the continuous performance for the pseudo sign is changed, or the continuous performance being executed is stopped or stopped. It is good also as a structure which can switch whether it interrupts.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of remaining games of the continuous effect when the state is shifted to the second BB state is grasped, and whether or not to change the effect mode is switched according to the grasped remaining number of games. Specifically, when the grasped number of remaining games is greater than a predetermined number (for example, one game), a change is made to a continuous effect for a pseudo-sign (loss notification), and the grasped number of remaining games is less than or equal to the predetermined number. In the case of , the continuous performance is stopped and the bonus performance is executed.

When the continuous effect has progressed to some extent, the player may generally recognize the win. Switching to loss notification in such a state that the player is almost aware of the win may provoke the player's antipathy and reduce interest in the continuous performance. In this respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the execution of the loss notification in a state where the player is almost aware of the win.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs said switching by the kind of continuous production|presentation under execution. For example, in the case of the first continuous effect, the change is made to the continuous effect for similar signs (notice of failure), and in the case of the second continuous effect, the continuous effect being executed is canceled or interrupted. For example, the first continuous production has a production configuration in which it is impossible or difficult to determine whether it is successful or not until the end, whereas the second continuous production is such that the winning is confirmed or the possibility of winning is high at the time of execution. In this case, it is preferable to use this configuration.

(39) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the scenario data table is rewritten when the first game in the second BB state is started when the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed to that for the pseudo sign. It may be configured to rewrite at the end of the game in which the 2nd BB winning has been established.

(40) In the above-described fourth embodiment, when executing the continuous production for the present sign, in addition to the continuous production, it corresponds to the establishment of a specific opportunity (the execution opportunity of the continuous production) or during the execution of the continuous production. A specific notification (notification that the player can recognize or guess that a specific opportunity has been established or that a continuous effect is being executed) may be performed. In this case, the specific notification may be continued even after the production mode of the continuous production for the main sign is changed to that for the pseudo sign with the transition to the second BB state. According to this configuration, even when the effect mode is changed to the pseudo-prediction due to the transition to the second BB state, the player can determine that the player is actually in the winning state by seeing the specific notification. becomes possible. At that time, in order to evoke a sense of superiority in the player who grasps the winning state based on the specific notification by making the specific notification known only to those who know the specific notification, the above-mentioned specific notification is performed as a continuous effect. (Auxiliary display unit 65) is performed by a notification means (for example, upper lamp 63 or dedicated lamp unit), or a specific notification mode is less conspicuous than continuous effect (for example, the display size is changed to that of continuous effect) It is preferable to make it smaller than ).

In addition, when a specific notification is displayed, the display position of the specific notification after the production mode of the continuous production is changed to the pseudo sign is changed in order to prevent the player from losing sight of the notification and being confused. , is preferably the same position as the display position immediately before the change. At that time, for example, when performing a specific notification on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, it is preferable to set the display position on the display screen to the same position. However, in the case of enhancing the sense of superiority of the player who knows the existence of the notification and its role by making it difficult to notice, the display position of the specific notification may be changed before and after the change. Incidentally, it is preferable that the specific notification is continued at least until the continuous effect executed after the end of the second BB state ends (until the final game of the continuous effect ends).

Each configuration described in (40) above can also be applied to the first and second embodiments. That is, when executing the continuous effect for the present sign, the specific notification is performed, and when the continuous effect is canceled or interrupted due to the transition to the second BB state, the specific notification is continued even after the cancellation or interruption. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(41) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the winning notification may be performed in a predetermined game in the middle of the continuous effect for this omen, not in the final game. In such a configuration, when the state is shifted to the second BB state before the execution of the winning notification, the effect mode of the continuous effect is changed to that for a pseudo sign, and when the state is shifted to the second BB state after the execution of the winning notification, The continuous performance for the main sign may be continued without changing the performance mode, or the continuous performance being executed may be canceled or interrupted.

In addition, in the case of winning state such as CZ mode, in the configuration where it is possible to stop the reach number in each of the reels 32L to 32R, if the state is shifted to the second BB state before the stop of the reach number, When the performance mode of the continuous performance is changed to that for the pseudo omen, and the state of the second BB is shifted after the stop of the ready-to-win eye, the continuous performance for the real omen is continued or executed without changing the performance mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the continuous performance during the middle is stopped or interrupted. In addition, the reach eyes here are specific symbol combinations that can be stopped on the effective line when winning CZ mode etc. (excluding the 2nd BB) and cannot be stopped in the non-winning state. It is an outlier that does not correspond to any winning combination.

(42) In the above-described fourth embodiment, when changing the effect mode of the continuous effect to that for the pseudo sign, in order to make the type correspond to the continuous effect before the change, it is executed at the time of transition to the second BB state. Although the type of the continuous effect for the current sign is grasped, it may be configured to grasp the type set by the setting processing in step S2209.

(43) In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the transition to the second BB state occurs during the execution of the continuous effect for the present sign, the effect mode is changed so as to notify the failure. It is good also as composition which performs information different from loss information like production (tie information). Incidentally, the draw effect may be a special effect when the omen mode is extended in the middle of the continuous effect. In this case, the execution of the draw effect enables the player to recognize the winning of the CZ mode or the like. Further, the draw effect may be executed in the continuous effect for the real sign when the sign mode is not extended, or in the continuous effect for the pseudo sign. At that time, in the continuous production for the real omen, after the draw production is performed, the winning production (notice of winning) is carried out, and in the continuous production for the pseudo-omen, the draw production is carried out. After that, it is preferable to perform a loss performance (loss notification).

(44) In the above-described fifth embodiment, in executing the continuous effect using the remaining sign mode after the second BB state, the continuous effect is started from the final game of the second BB bonus game. Alternatively, the continuous effect may be started when the number of remaining bonus games reaches a predetermined number of games equal to or greater than two games. In this case, the predetermined number of games is obtained by subtracting the remaining number of games in the precursor mode after the second BB state (for example, 1 game) from the number of games (for example, 3 games) in which continuous effects are executed using the remaining precursor mode after the second BB state. (2 games, for example). At that time, first, the number of games to be executed in the continuous effect is determined by lottery or the like without referring to the number of remaining games in the precursor mode after the second BB state, and then the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is determined based on the determined number of games to be executed. may be set as the predetermined number of games.

Since the number of bonus games to be played fluctuates, it is difficult to accurately specify the number of remaining games. Alternatively, the number of games played after the start of the bonus game is subtracted from the estimated value, and when the subtracted value reaches the predetermined number of games, the continuous effect is started. In this case, compared to the case where the continuous effect is started from the last game, the deviation from the sign mode is more likely to occur, but it is possible to secure a large number of games that can be added. It is possible to prevent the continuous production using the remaining omen modes from giving a light impression.

If the specified or estimated number of bonus games to be executed does not match the actual number of games to be executed, and the former is smaller than the latter, then the number of remaining games of the continuous effect at the end of the bonus game is greater than the remaining number of games. The number of remaining games in the mode is greater. As a result, the portent mode ends with a delay from the end of the continuous performance, causing a situation in which the transition to the CZ mode or the like is not made even if winning notification is executed in the continuous performance. In this case, as in the above-described first and second embodiments, a preliminary effect related to the continuous effect being executed may be executed to delay notification of winning in the continuous effect.

At that time, the preliminary effect may be performed with the number of times or the length corresponding to the surplus of the number of remaining games in the portent mode with respect to the number of remaining games in the continuous effect. Also, the preliminary effect may be executed in the next game after the bonus game is finished, or may be executed in the game after that (executed at a good break point in the flow of the continuous effect). Incidentally, the surplus can be specified at the end of the bonus game or at the end of the bonus game. Therefore, the preliminary effect setting process may be performed when the final game of the bonus game is started or when the bonus game is finished.

(45) In the fifth embodiment, the number of remaining games is specified based on the remaining number of bonus games up to the maximum payout number. However, for example, if the number of bonus games to be executed is uniquely determined, the remaining games are determined based on the number of games completed after the bonus game is started. It is good also as composition which specifies a number.

(46) In the sixth embodiment, when the second ending effect being executed is canceled due to the transition to the second BB state, the ending effect is not executed after the second BB state ends. It is good also as a structure which performs an ending production after completion|finish of. According to this configuration, the ending effect after the end of the second BB state is executed to the end, so even if the previous second ending effect is canceled due to the transition to the second BB state, it is advantageous to the player. It is possible to appropriately notify the end of the section.

In that case, as the ending effect after the end of the second BB state, the continuation of the canceled second ending effect may be executed, or as the ending effect after the end of the second BB state, the canceled second ending effect. It may be configured to execute a new ending effect that is not a continuation of .

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can switch whether to perform the continuation of the discontinued 2nd ending effect, or to perform a new ending effect. For example, when a plurality of types of bonus games with different lengths (maximum payout number) are provided, depending on the type of bonus game (in other words, the length of the bonus game) shifted during execution of the second ending effect, The configuration is such that the above switching is performed. Specifically, in the case of a bonus game with a short execution period, the continuation of the stopped ending effect is executed as an ending effect after the bonus game, and in the case of a bonus game with a long execution period, the ending effect after the bonus game is executed. As a result, a new ending effect is executed.

In addition, in the 2BB bonus game, the net increase in the number of medals per game is a negative value, and the number of medals is reduced. number of games remaining until reaching the number) is likely to be greater than that at the time of transition to the second BB state. Therefore, when executing the ending effect after the end of the second BB state, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (the number of remaining games until reaching the upper limit increase number) is grasped again, and the ending effect is made to correspond to the remaining number of games. should be executed.

In addition, the player may use the effect switch 66 or the like to select whether to continue the canceled second ending effect or to execute a new ending effect.

(47) In the sixth embodiment, if the transition to the second BB state occurs during execution of the first ending effect, the ending effect is continued. may be configured. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, the first ending effect is only continued due to the relationship with the portent mode, and the cancellation or suspension of the first ending effect due to circumstances other than the portent mode. I am not denying it.

(48) In the sixth embodiment, in the second ending effect, the end notification (character notification such as "Congratulations" or "END") is executed in the final game of the ending effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the notification is made over a plurality of games (for example, five games from the end of the advantageous section). In such a configuration, when the state shifts to the second BB state after the end notification is executed (started), the end of the advantageous section has already been notified, so the second ending effect is continued as it is, and the end notification is given. The second ending effect being executed may be canceled or interrupted only when the transition to the second BB state occurs before the execution (start) of .

(49) In the above-described sixth embodiment, the effect corresponding to the end of the advantageous section was illustrated as the ending effect, but the ending effect corresponds to the end of the game state other than the advantageous section. good too.

(50) In the sixth embodiment, the ending effect is performed by repeating the animation video for a certain period of time. The configuration may be such that In such a configuration, as in the seventh embodiment, if the number of remaining games in the ending effect increases in the middle, it is necessary to deal with such a case. As in the second embodiment, it is preferable to execute a preliminary effect (preliminary effect related to the ending effect being executed) the number of times or the length corresponding to the increase in the number of remaining games.

(51) In the above seventh embodiment, when determining whether or not to stop the second ending effect being executed, the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games is 30 (expected number of bonus games to be executed). Although it is determined whether the number of remaining games is less than the expected number of bonus games to be executed (for example, 10 games), it may be determined whether or not the number of remaining games is less. According to this configuration, for example, in a situation where the advantageous section ends during the bonus game, if the period for the bonus effect can be sufficiently secured even if the second ending effect is continued, the second ending effect is continued. On the other hand, if the period for the bonus effect is insufficient if the second ending effect is continued, the second ending effect can be stopped. In other words, it becomes possible to decide whether to stop or continue the second ending effect, taking into consideration the execution status of the bonus effect.

(52) In the seventh embodiment, when determining whether or not to stop the second ending effect being executed, whether or not a reversal phenomenon occurs (the upper limit number of games is reached before the upper limit increase number) or not) may be determined. In addition, in the above-described seventh embodiment, when the reversal phenomenon occurs during the bonus game (when the maximum number of games is reached during the bonus game), the ending effect is continued. occurs (when the upper limit number of games is reached earlier than the upper limit increase number after the bonus game), the ending effect may be continued. In this case, the ending effect is executed across the bonus game.

(53) In the seventh embodiment, the first ending effect and the second ending effect may have different effect modes. In this case, when it is determined to continue the second ending effect being executed, the second ending effect may be continued as it is, or the ending effect may be continued after changing to the first ending effect. However, the former configuration is preferable in order not to give an unnatural impression to the player.

(54) In the seventh embodiment, the first notification that the player can recognize or guess that the advantageous section will end when the upper limit increase number is reached (for example, teaching the remaining number up to the upper limit increase number) or suggesting notification) may be performed during execution of the second ending effect. In such a configuration, when it is determined that the second ending effect is to be shifted to the second BB state during the execution of the second ending effect and the ending effect is to be continued, the continuing ending effect (the ending effect that ends when the upper limit number of games is reached) A configuration may be adopted in which the first notification is not executed (deleted).

In addition, in the continued ending effect, a second notification that the player can recognize or guess that the advantageous section will end by reaching the upper limit number of games (for example, teaching or indicating the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games) It is good also as a structure which performs the notification suggesting. In this case, the second notification may be performed even in the ending effect started as the first ending effect from the beginning.

(55) In each of the above embodiments, the CZ mode, the AT mode, and the addition of the number of games in the AT mode have been exemplified as special states advantageous to the player, but the special states are not limited to these. It may be a mode or the like.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous interval ends when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the upper limit number of games or when the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous interval MY reaches the upper limit increase number. The advantageous section may end even when the AT mode ends.

(57) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is set to a predetermined fixed value. The advantageous section may be terminated by the upper limit number of games. In addition, the upper limit increase number is not limited to one predetermined fixed value, but a plurality of upper limit numbers of games are provided, and the upper limit increase number is selected from among them by lottery or set value, etc. may end.

(58) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus game in which the number of medals decreases is exemplified as a bonus game. low medal increase rate). Note that the slightly increasing bonus game may be one in which the expected net increase in number per game is less than 0.5.

Also, in that the rate of increase in medals changes from the game state up to that point, the medals may increase normally (advantageous to the player) rather than a slight increase. In this case, the medal increase rate may be higher than in the AT mode, or the medal increase rate may be lower than in the AT mode and higher than in the normal game state (normal mode or CZ mode). good.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, the bonus game was exemplified as the specific state, but any game other than the bonus game may be used as long as the portent mode is extended.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed even in the normal section. In this case, the superiority of the advantageous section is ensured by adopting a configuration in which the AT mode shift winning is less likely to occur in the normal section than in the advantageous section.

(61) In each of the above embodiments, the continuous effect is performed by notification means such as the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. good too. In particular, by using separate notification means for executing the pressing order notification effect and the specific role notification effect and the notification means for executing the continuous effect, the presence or absence of the shift to the AT mode, the pressing order bell, and the specific combination are performed. Events with different interests of the player, such as the presence or absence of omissions at the time of winning a role, are notified by separate notification means. It is possible to suppress the event of erroneous operation of 42-44. Also, the ending effect may be executed by notification means other than the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

Further, the continuous effect, the preliminary effect, and the ending effect are not limited to those executed by the image displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and may be a light emitting effect using a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable effect. It may be a role production using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for the purpose, or a combination of these may be used. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be visual, and may be auditory, for example, using sound effects.

(62) In each of the above embodiments, the game of the 3-bet game performed with the 2nd BB won in the 2-bet game carried over is explained as a normal game, but the 1st BB won in the 3-bet game is carried over. A 2-bet game played in this state may be the normal game, or a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game played without carrying over the 1st BB or the 2nd BB may be the normal game. A 2-bet game played with the 2nd BB carried over may be the normal game, and a 3-bet game played with the 1st BB carried over may be the normal game. Further, the game may be progressed while switching between these games depending on the game situation. Specifically, based on the first switching opportunity, for example, switching from any of the games performed in the 2-bet game to any of the games performed in the 3-bet game, and based on the second switching opportunity, for example, , switching from any of the above games performed in the 3-bet game to any of the above-described games performed in the 2-bet game may be the normal game.

(63) The probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery and the game result that triggers the advantageous zone transition lottery are not limited to those exemplified in the above embodiments.

In addition, although it is configured to shift to the advantageous section in the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won, it may be configured to shift to the advantageous section in the game next to the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won. A predetermined number of games may exist between the game in which the game is won and the game in which the game is shifted to the advantageous interval.

Further, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is started in the game that shifts to the advantageous section, but the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started in the game following the game that shifts to the advantageous section. The display may be started, or a predetermined number of games may exist between the game in which the transition to the advantageous section is started and the game in which the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

(64) In each of the above embodiments, the ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. It is sufficient that the increase/decrease rate and the increase/decrease mode of the paid balls (game media) are changed depending on the number. For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(65) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(66) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state where the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball entry rate to the ball entry portion is high and low, the advantageous section, CZ mode, and AT mode in the slot machine 10 are defined as the high ball entry state. Each invention may be applied. In addition, in pachinko machines, the period during which 3-bet games are played in the waiting period of Omen mode, CZ mode, etc. (the period during which the number of remaining games in each mode is updated) is the first special game (first special The second special figure applies to the period in which the variable display in the figure) is performed, and the period in which the 2 bet game and the bonus game in the 2 BB state are performed in the waiting period (the period in which the number of remaining games in each mode is not updated) It may be applied to the period in which the game (variation display of the second special figure) is performed.

(67) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine is of a type in which when medals as game media are inserted, the game can be started by setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. A configuration is known in which a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the enjoyment of games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (won a trigger role in the shift lottery), a special state that is advantageous to the player (CZ mode, AT mode, addition of the number of games in AT mode) is generated. Special judgment means for executing judgment (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by main controller 101);
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state, a specific notification corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result (victory effect, successful transformation effect) Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting processing by main controller 101, second game number management a function to execute processing (processing to set the CZ counter);
When the waiting period has passed, or when a predetermined transition condition (electing an AT mode transition trigger role) is established after the waiting period has passed, a special state transition that shifts the game state to the special state Means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, a specific effect (continuous effect) executed over a plurality of games is started in a predetermined game during the waiting period, and the predetermined game is performed in the specific effect. specific effect setting means for setting the specific notification to be executed in a specific game after the game (a function of setting the information of the precursor scenario in the scenario data table by the display control device 81);
Specific effect executing means (display control unit) for executing the specific effect by predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table) A function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the device 81);
A specification for making the waiting period longer than the period set by the waiting period setting means at least when a predetermined condition (the game is started with the number of bets set to 2) is established during execution of the specific effect. Means (a function of executing the number-of-games update process by the main controller 101 (not updating the omen counter and CZ counter in the case of a 2-bet game);
A delay for delaying the execution game so that, when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the specific effect, the execution game of the specific notification is a game after the specific game set by the specific effect setting means. Means (function for executing continuous effect setting processing and continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81 (function for executing the effect of this precursory preliminary scenario));
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination based on the establishment of the predetermined determination trigger becomes the specific result, at least one of the transition to the special state advantageous to the player and the specific notification of winning the specific result is performed. A waiting period to wait is set. During this standby period, the specific effect is executed over a plurality of games, and the specific notification is performed in the specific game during the specific effect. Then, after the waiting period has elapsed or when a predetermined transition condition is met, the game state is transitioned to the special state. In other words, after the specific notification is made in the specific effect and the player is notified of the winning, the game state shifts to a special state or a transitionable state (a state that shifts due to the establishment of the transition condition). ing.

Here, in this configuration, at least when a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect, the waiting period is extended, and the ending game of the period is delayed. On the other hand, since the specific effect is set based on the waiting period before the extension, the execution timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are deviated. For this reason, there is a possibility that the transition to the special state may take some time even though the winning has been notified by the specific notification, and there is a concern that the player's confidence in the performance will be lowered. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined condition is established during the execution of the specific effect, the execution game of the specific notification is delayed so that the specific notification is performed in the game after the initially set specific game. . As a result, the execution timing of the specific notification can be delayed according to the extension of the waiting period, and the deviation between the waiting period and the specific effect can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience, and to improve the interest of the game.

In this feature, the premise configuration is "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the design is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied. 26L, 26M, and areas of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible through 26L), variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. A gaming machine in which a game is played as one game when the is stopped."

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the delay means delays the execution game with respect to the specific game by the same period as the waiting period extended by the specifying means.

According to the above configuration, the execution game of the specific notification is delayed by the extension of the waiting period, so that the waiting period and the specific effect can be preferably synchronized. As a result, even when the standby period is extended, it is possible to perform the specific notification at the timing intended for the standby period (in other words, the design timing at the time of designing the performance).

Feature A3. The specifying means, when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the waiting period, makes the waiting period longer than the period set by the waiting period setting means,
A second delay means (a function of executing a continuous effect standby process by the display control device 81) for delaying the start of the specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the waiting period and before the specific effect is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, if the predetermined condition is satisfied during the standby period, the standby period is extended. There may be a gap between performance and performance. In this regard, in this configuration, if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the execution of the specific effect during the waiting period, the start of the specific effect is delayed. However, it is possible to preferably eliminate the gap between the rest of the waiting period and the specific effect.

Feature A4. The delay means, when the predetermined condition is met during the execution of the specific effect, the preliminary effect executing means (continuously displayed by the display control device 81) for executing the preliminary effect related to the specific effect (the effect of this precursor preliminary scenario). A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that it has a function of executing effect setting processing and continuous effect execution processing.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary performance is executed when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific performance, the gap in the performance due to the delay of the specific notification can be filled with the preliminary performance. At this time, if, for example, an effect unrelated to the specific effect is executed as a preliminary effect, the player may be given the impression that the specific effect suddenly ends. In particular, a player who has been watching the specific performance while expecting a win may have the impression that the win has disappeared, which may confuse the player. In this regard, in this configuration, since an effect related to the specific effect is executed as the preliminary effect, the specific effect to be executed before and after the preliminary effect can be preferably connected by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the specific effect is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

It should be noted that an effect related to the specific effect may be one that causes the player to recall (associate) the specific effect. Specifically, what displays in common with the specific production (for example, characters that appear in the specific production also appear in the preliminary production), and those that have conceptual commonality (for example, the specific production is the battle production In this case, it is conceivable that a notification that suggests the subsequent development, a notification that raises the expectation of the battle production, etc. is performed in the preliminary production).

Feature A5. updating means for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period according to the execution of the game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means (function for executing game number updating processing by main controller 101); prepared,
The identifying means prevents execution of updating the number of remaining games by the updating means when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the delay means executes the preliminary effect in response to a period during which the number of remaining games is not updated by the specifying means.

In the above configuration, the preliminary effect is executed only for the number of games remaining in the standby period that is not updated, so that the standby period and the specific effect can be preferably synchronized while connecting (extending) the specific effect with the preliminary effect. .

Feature A6. The specific effect is configured so that the content of the effect progresses according to the execution of the game,
After the preliminary performance is executed by the preliminary performance execution means, the specific performance executing means performs a performance following the specific performance executed before the preliminary performance is executed in the game in which the predetermined condition is not established. The game machine according to feature A4 or feature A5, characterized in that it executes.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific performance, the preliminary performance is inserted into the specific performance, and the subsequent specific performance is resumed after the preliminary performance is executed. In other words, the specific effect that should have been executed if the preliminary effect was not executed (if the predetermined condition was not satisfied) was executed after the preliminary effect was executed, so it was the same as if the preliminary effect had not been executed. Then, it is possible to maintain the production flow up to the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to delay the execution timing of the specific notification while achieving consistency in performance between the case where the preliminary performance is executed and the case where the preliminary performance is not executed.

In addition, for example, if it is configured to execute a dedicated effect different from the specific effect after the preliminary effect is executed, setting processing for executing the dedicated effect is performed, and effect data for that purpose is prepared (moving image data etc. are stored. ), but in this configuration, settings and effect data for specific effects can be diverted, so setting processing for exclusive effects and preparation of effect data can be made unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the processing load on production control and an increase in the amount of data.

In addition, for example, if the configuration is such that a dedicated performance different from the specific performance is executed after the execution of the preliminary performance, a new countermeasure is required as to what to do when the predetermined condition is established again during the execution of the dedicated performance. There is a risk. With this configuration, this point can be dealt with by inserting a preliminary effect each time, and new countermeasures can be eliminated. In other words, there is also the advantage that it is possible to flexibly deal with the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied multiple times.

Feature A7. Any of the characteristics A4 to A6, wherein the preliminary effect executing means includes means for executing at least part of the effect executed as part of the specific effect as at least part of the preliminary effect. The gaming machine described in Crab.

In the above configuration, since at least part of the effect executed as part of the specific effect is used as at least part of the preliminary effect, it is possible to execute the preliminary effect highly related to the specific effect. Moreover, since the effect data for the specific effect can be utilized as the effect data for the preliminary effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the amount of data associated with the preliminary effect.

Feature A8. As the specific effects, at least a first specific effect (first continuous effect) and a second specific effect (second continuous effect) different from the first specific effect are provided,
As the preliminary performance, at least a first preliminary performance corresponding to the first specific performance (a performance of the main precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the first continuous performance) and the first preliminary performance are different from the first preliminary performance. A second preliminary effect corresponding to 2 specific effects (a production of this precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the second continuous effect) is provided,
The preliminary effect executing means executes the first preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the first specific effect, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the second specific effect, The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A7, wherein the second preliminary effect is executed.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary performance corresponding to the type of the specific performance being executed is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when the preliminary performance is executed and the impression that the specific performance is being performed fades. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the specific effect is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion. In addition, it is possible to have a configuration suitable for executing a preliminary effect highly related to the specific effect.

Feature A9. The specific effect is configured so that the content of the effect progresses according to the execution of the game,
As the preliminary production, a plurality of types of the preliminary production (production of the main omen preliminary scenario) are provided,
Each of the preliminary effects has a mode of effect corresponding to the execution order of effects (effects of the main precursor scenario) executed in each game as the specific effects,
The preliminary effect executing means, when executing the preliminary effect in place of a predetermined effect (for example, the effect of the present precursor scenario H-2) executed as the specific effect, performs the above-mentioned effect corresponding to the execution order of the predetermined effect. Equipped with means for executing a preliminary effect (effect of the main precursor scenario H-2) (function of executing each effect of the main precursor scenario and the main precursor scenario based on the value of the continuous production counter by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A8, characterized in that

In the above configuration, the specific effect is configured so that the content of the effect progresses according to the execution of the game. Preliminary performances of various kinds are provided. Then, when the preliminary performance is executed during execution of the specific performance, the preliminary performance corresponding to the execution order of the performance (predetermined performance) scheduled to be executed in the game if the predetermined condition is not satisfied is executed. be done. For example, if a uniform effect is executed in any game during the specific effect, the flow of the specific effect is obstructed by the preliminary effect, and the player feels uncomfortable. There is a concern that it may become difficult to understand the content of the specific production. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since it is possible to execute the preliminary effect in accordance with the flow of the specific effect, it is possible to preferably prevent the flow of the specific effect from being hindered by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incompatibility or having difficulty in understanding the content of the specific performance, and to suitably suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the preliminary performance.

Feature A10. The specific effect executing means executes the predetermined effect in the game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the game after the preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order is executed. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the effect that should have been originally executed as the specific effect is executed after the preliminary effect is executed. For example, in the case of a story-tailored specific effect, if part of the specific effect is missing, the flow of the effect becomes difficult to understand, but according to this configuration, such a lack of effect is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance flow up to the specific notification in the same way as when the preliminary performance is not executed, and to match the performance between the case where the preliminary performance is executed and the case where it is not executed. It is possible to delay the execution timing of the specific notification while striving.

Feature A11. The preliminary effect executing means includes means for executing the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is established (function for executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81 according to the first embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A10, characterized by:

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect is executed in the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, every time the waiting period is extended, the extension is covered by the preliminary effect. Therefore, it is possible to synchronize the standby period and the specific effect with a simple configuration.

Feature A12. The preliminary effect execution means is means for executing the preliminary effect in a game during the standby period after the game in which the predetermined condition is established (for continuous effect execution by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment). A gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A11, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is met during execution of the specific effect, the continuation of the specific effect is given priority, and the preliminary effect is postponed. As a result, it is possible to execute the preliminary effect at a good break point in the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the preliminary performance from being executed at an incomplete timing in the flow of the specific performance, and the flow of the performance being hindered.

Feature A13. The preliminary effect executing means is grasping means for grasping the number of games in which the waiting period has been extended by the identifying means (function of executing addition processing of the preliminary effect counter by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment). means for executing the preliminary effect according to the number of games grasped by the grasping means in the game during the waiting period after the game in which the predetermined condition is established (according to the second embodiment A gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized by comprising a function of executing preliminary effect processing by the display control device 81).

For example, when the predetermined condition is met a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the progress of the specific effect is frequently interrupted due to the execution of the preliminary effect. In this regard, in the present configuration, the extension of the standby effect generated during the specific effect is grasped, and the preliminary effect of the length corresponding to the extension is collectively executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the interruption of the specific effect due to the preliminary effect, and it is possible to preferably prevent the player from understanding the development of the effect.

Feature A14. Preliminary effect setting means for setting the preliminary effect based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (a function of setting the information of the present precursor preliminary scenario in the scenario data table by the main control device 101);
The preliminary effect execution means executes the preliminary effect based on the setting result of the preliminary effect setting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The preliminary effect setting means is means for executing the preliminary effect setting process in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary effect is executed (the information of the preliminary precursor scenario corresponding to the second game and thereafter is set for one game of continuous effect). A game machine according to any one of features A4 to A13, characterized in that it has a function to be set at the start of the game.

In the above configuration, the preliminary effect setting process is executed in the game prior to the game in which the preliminary effect is executed, so the preliminary effect can be executed smoothly. As a result, for example, even if the control process is in a high load state when the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the process failure.

The present feature may further include a feature that "the preliminary effect setting means performs the preliminary effect setting process in a game in which the specific effect setting means performs the setting process of the specific effect". In this case, the preliminary effect can be executed smoothly when executing the preliminary effect in the game after the second game of the specific effect, and when executing the preliminary effect in the starting game (first game) of the specific effect. Also, it becomes possible to execute the preliminary performance according to the setting.

In addition, in the configuration of feature A8 for executing a type of preliminary effect corresponding to the type of specific effect, and the configuration of feature A9 for executing a type of preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order, it depends on at what timing the preliminary effect is executed. Since the preliminary effect to be executed changes, it is necessary to select a preliminary effect suitable for each occasion, and there is a concern that the processing load and the risk of processing failure will increase. By applying this feature to these configurations, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature A15. If a predetermined condition (winning a pseudo sign execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means, the second specific effect (pseudo A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific about notification process by the display control device 81) that sets so that a continuous effect for an omen is executed;
Second specific effect execution means for executing the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means (function for executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81) When,
with
Any one of features A4 to A14, wherein the preliminary effect execution means comprises means for not executing the preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the second specific effect. The game machine described.

In order to avoid the fact that the specific result is won immediately at the time of execution of the specific effect, a function of executing a specific effect (second specific effect) not premised on the winning may be provided. This second specific effect is executed irrespective of the waiting period, but if a predetermined condition is established during the execution of the specific effect that is not affected by the waiting period, the preliminary effect is executed in this configuration. It is configured not to As a result, the frequency of setting and executing the preliminary effect can be kept low, and the load of control processing can be reduced.

Feature A16. If a predetermined condition (winning a pseudo sign execution lottery) is satisfied in a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means, the second specific effect (pseudo A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific about notification process by the display control device 81) that sets so that a continuous effect for an omen is executed;
Second specific effect execution means for executing the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means (function for executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81) When,
with
The preliminary effect executing means includes means for executing the preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the second specific effect. game machine.

In order to avoid the fact that the specific result is won immediately at the time of execution of the specific effect, a function of executing a specific effect (second specific effect) not premised on the winning may be provided. This second specific performance is executed irrespective of the waiting period, but even if a predetermined condition is established during the execution of the specific performance not affected by the waiting period, the preliminary performance is executed in this configuration. It is configured to run. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that the winning of the specific result is known in advance by the presence or absence of the preliminary performance, and the player's expectation for the ending of the specific performance can be maintained for a long time.

Feature A17. a first device (main controller 101);
a second device (display control device 81) electrically connected to the first device and operated based on a signal from the first device;
with
The first device is
At least, the special determination means, the waiting period setting means, the special state transition means, and the specifying means,
updating means for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period according to the execution of the game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means (function for executing game number updating processing by main controller 101); prepared,
The specifying means prevents execution of updating the number of remaining games by the updating means when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The second device comprises the specific effect setting means, the specific effect executing means and the delay means,
The first device receives a first signal (forecast game number update command, CZ game number update command) corresponding to the update of the number of remaining games by the updating means, or the remaining game by the updating means. An output means (a function of executing command output processing by the main controller 101) for outputting a second signal (forecast game number non-update command, CZ game number non-update command) corresponding to the fact that the number is not updated,
The second device comprises grasping means (display control device) for grasping that the first signal is not output by the output means or that the update of the number of remaining games is not executed based on the output of the second signal. 81 function for executing continuous effect execution processing),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, wherein the delay means delays the execution game based on the grasped result of the grasping means.

In the above configuration, the first device and the second device having the first device as a higher-level device are provided, and the control processing related to the game performance is entrusted to the second device, so that the processing load of the first device can be reduced. becomes possible. However, since the number of remaining games during the waiting period is managed by the first device, there is a possibility that the number of remaining games may be recognized differently between the first device and the second device. There is a concern that the specific notification execution game cannot be delayed appropriately. In this regard, in this configuration, a first signal indicating that the number of remaining games in the waiting period has been updated or a second signal indicating that the number of remaining games in the waiting period has not been updated is sent from the first device to the second device. It is configured to output In this case, when the predetermined condition is established and the number of remaining games in the standby period is not updated, the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. Therefore, on the second device side, by referring to whether or not the first signal is output or whether the second signal is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the number of remaining games in the standby period has been updated in the first device. can. This suppresses discrepancies in recognition of the number of remaining games, and even in a configuration in which the processing is shared between the first device and the second device, the execution game of the specific notification is not performed in response to the extension of the waiting period. Appropriate delay is possible.

In addition, in this feature, "at least one of the first signal and the second signal includes information on the number of remaining games, or the output means includes means for outputting a third signal including information on the number of remaining games. You may further provide the structure of "included." According to this configuration, even if there is a discrepancy, it is possible to correct the discrepancy in the second device based on the first signal, the second signal, or the third signal.

Feature A18. When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the number of games remaining in the waiting period is updated based on the fact that the game is started with the number of bets set to the first number (3). Update means (function for executing game number update processing by main control device 101),
The identifying means prevents execution of updating the number of remaining games by the updating means when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The predetermined condition is that the game is started with the bet number set to a second number (2) different from the first number. game machine.

In this configuration, the standby period may or may not be extended depending on the number of bets when playing the game. For example, in a situation where the player is inserting game media for maintenance, the player intended to start the game by inserting the first number of game media, but unintentionally started the game by inserting the second number. It can happen often. In this case, it is conceivable to warn the player and urge him not to start the game with the second number, but there is a risk that the player's interest will be distracted and it will be difficult to concentrate on the specific effect. be. In this respect, in the present configuration, any one of the above features A1 to A16 is applied to the extension of the waiting period based on the player's operation, and the gaming machine side takes measures. As a result, the player's operation error (mistake in the number of bets) is allowed, so that the player can enjoy the specific effect without worrying about the number of bets.

For each configuration of the features A1 to A18, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (won a trigger role in the shift lottery), a special state that is advantageous to the player (CZ mode, AT mode, addition of the number of games in AT mode) is generated. Special judgment means for executing judgment (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by main controller 101);
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state, a specific notification corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result (victory effect, successful transformation effect) Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting processing by main controller 101, second game number management a function to execute processing (processing to set the CZ counter);
Special state transition means for transitioning the game state to the special state when the waiting period elapses, or when a predetermined transition condition (electing the AT mode transition trigger role) is established after the elapse of the waiting period. (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, a specific effect setting means (display control) for setting a specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed over a plurality of games to be executed in the waiting period A function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the device 81);
Specific effect executing means (display control unit) for executing the specific effect by predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table) A function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the device 81);
A specification for making the waiting period longer than the period set by the waiting period setting means at least when a predetermined condition (the game is started with the number of bets set to 2) is established during execution of the specific effect. Means (a function of executing the number-of-games update process by the main controller 101 (not updating the omen counter and CZ counter in the case of a 2-bet game);
Preliminary effect executing means (continuous effect setting processing by display control device 81, continuous a function to execute a production execution process);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination based on the establishment of the predetermined determination trigger becomes the specific result, at least one of the transition to the special state advantageous to the player and the specific notification of winning the specific result is performed. A waiting period to wait is set. During this standby period, the specific effect is executed over a plurality of games in response to winning the specific result. Then, after the waiting period has elapsed or when a predetermined transition condition is met, the game state is transitioned to the special state. In other words, after the player is notified of the winning of the specific result by the specific effect, the game state shifts to a special state or a transitionable state (a state that shifts when the transition condition is established). .

Here, in this configuration, at least when a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect, the waiting period is extended, and the ending game of the period is delayed. On the other hand, the specific effect is set based on the waiting period before the extension, so the timing of notification of winning in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are deviated. For this reason, there is a possibility that the transition to the special state may take some time even though the notification of winning has been made, and there is a concern that the player's trust in the performance will be lowered. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined condition is established during execution of a specific effect, a preliminary effect is executed instead of the specific effect, so that notification of winning in the specific effect is delayed accordingly. In other words, since the timing of notification of winning can be delayed according to the extension of the waiting period, it is possible to eliminate the gap between the waiting period and the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience, and to improve the interest of the game.

At this time, if, for example, an effect unrelated to the specific effect is executed as a preliminary effect, the player may be given the impression that the specific effect suddenly ends. In particular, a player who has been watching the specific performance while expecting a win may have the impression that the win has disappeared, which may confuse the player. In this regard, in this configuration, since an effect related to the specific effect is executed as the preliminary effect, the specific effect to be executed before and after the preliminary effect can be preferably connected by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the specific effect is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

It should be noted that an effect related to the specific effect may be one that causes the player to recall (associate) the specific effect. Specifically, what displays in common with the specific production (for example, characters that appear in the specific production also appear in the preliminary production), and those that have conceptual commonality (for example, the specific production is the battle production In this case, it is conceivable that a notification that suggests the subsequent development, a notification that raises the expectation of the battle production, etc. is performed in the preliminary production).

In addition, in this feature, as a premise configuration, "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied. 26L, 26M, and areas of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible through 26L), variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. A gaming machine in which a game is played as one game when the is stopped."

Feature B2. As the specific effects, at least a first specific effect (first continuous effect) and a second specific effect (second continuous effect) different from the first specific effect are provided,
As the preliminary performance, at least a first preliminary performance corresponding to the first specific performance (a performance of the main precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the first continuous performance) and the first preliminary performance are different from the first preliminary performance. A second preliminary effect corresponding to 2 specific effects (a production of this precursor preliminary scenario corresponding to the second continuous effect) is provided,
The preliminary effect executing means executes the first preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the first specific effect, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the second specific effect, The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second preliminary effect is executed.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary performance corresponding to the type of the specific performance being executed is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when the preliminary performance is executed and the impression that the specific performance is being performed fades. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having the impression that the specific effect is interrupted, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion.

Feature B3. The specific effect is configured so that the content of the effect progresses according to the execution of the game,
As the preliminary production, a plurality of types of the preliminary production (production of the main omen preliminary scenario) are provided,
Each of the preliminary effects has a mode of effect corresponding to the execution order of effects (effects of the main precursor scenario) executed in each game as the specific effects,
The preliminary effect executing means, when executing the preliminary effect in place of a predetermined effect (for example, the effect of the present precursor scenario H-2) executed as the specific effect, performs the above-mentioned effect corresponding to the execution order of the predetermined effect. Equipped with means for executing a preliminary effect (effect of the main precursor scenario H-2) (function of executing each effect of the main precursor scenario and the main precursor scenario based on the value of the continuous production counter by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that

In the above configuration, the specific effect is configured so that the content of the effect progresses according to the execution of the game. Preliminary performances of various kinds are provided. Then, when the preliminary performance is executed during execution of the specific performance, the preliminary performance corresponding to the execution order of the performance (predetermined performance) scheduled to be executed in the game if the predetermined condition is not satisfied is executed. be done. For example, if a uniform effect is executed in any game during the specific effect, the flow of the specific effect is obstructed by the preliminary effect, and the player feels uncomfortable. There is a concern that it may become difficult to understand the content of the specific production. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since it is possible to execute the preliminary effect in accordance with the flow of the specific effect, it is possible to preferably prevent the flow of the specific effect from being hindered by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incompatibility or having difficulty in understanding the content of the specific performance, and to suitably suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the preliminary performance.

Feature B4. Preliminary effect setting means (main a function of setting the information of this preliminary precursor scenario in the scenario data table by the control device 101;
The preliminary effect executing means executes the preliminary effect based on the setting result of the preliminary effect setting means when the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

In the above configuration, apart from the specific effect, the preliminary effect is set in correspondence with the number of games executed after the specific effect is started, the degree of progress of the specific effect, or the effect information of each game in the specific effect. According to this configuration, for example, when the preliminary performance is executed in the second game after the specific performance is started, the preliminary performance corresponding to the performance that should have been executed in the second game as the specific performance can be easily performed. can be specified, it is possible to suitably execute a preliminary effect corresponding to the effect of each game in the specific effect.

Feature B5. Preliminary effect setting means for setting the preliminary effect based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (a function of setting the information of the present precursor preliminary scenario in the scenario data table by the main control device 101);
The preliminary effect executing means executes the preliminary effect based on the setting result of the preliminary effect setting means when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect,
The preliminary effect setting means is means for executing the preliminary effect setting process in a game prior to the game in which the preliminary effect is executed (the information of the preliminary precursor scenario corresponding to the second game and thereafter is set for one game of continuous effect). A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized by comprising a function of setting at the start of

In the above configuration, the preliminary effect setting process is executed in the game prior to the game in which the preliminary effect is executed, so the preliminary effect can be executed smoothly. As a result, for example, even if the control process is in a high load state when the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the process failure.

It should be noted that in the configuration of feature B2 for executing a type of preliminary effect corresponding to the type of specific effect and the configuration of feature B3 for executing a type of preliminary effect corresponding to the execution order, it depends on at what timing the preliminary effect is executed. Since the preliminary effect to be executed changes, it is necessary to select a preliminary effect suitable for each occasion, and there is a concern that the processing load and the risk of processing failure will increase. By applying this feature to these configurations, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the preliminary effect setting means performs the preliminary effect setting process in a game in which the specific effect setting process is performed by the specific effect setting means.

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect is set according to the setting of the specific effect, when the preliminary effect is executed in the game after the second game of the specific effect, the preliminary effect can be executed smoothly. Even when the preliminary performance is executed in the start game (first game) of , the preliminary performance can be executed according to the setting.

Feature B7. The preliminary effect executing means includes means for executing the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is established (function for executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81 according to the first embodiment). The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized by:

In the above configuration, since the preliminary effect is executed in the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, every time the waiting period is extended, the extension is covered by the preliminary effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the preliminary effect at a good break point in the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the preliminary performance from being executed at an incomplete timing in the flow of the specific performance, and the flow of the performance being hindered.

Feature B8. The preliminary effect execution means is means for executing the preliminary effect in a game during the standby period after the game in which the predetermined condition is established (for continuous effect execution by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment). A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing.

In the above configuration, in a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of a specific effect, continuation of the specific effect is given priority, and the preliminary effect is postponed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the preliminary performance from being executed at an incomplete stage and the progress of the specific performance to be interrupted.

Feature B9. The preliminary effect executing means is grasping means for grasping the number of games in which the waiting period has been extended by the identifying means (function of executing addition processing of the preliminary effect counter by the display control device 81 according to the second embodiment). means for executing the preliminary effect over the number of games grasped by the grasping means in the game after the game in which the predetermined condition is established and during the waiting period (according to the second embodiment A gaming machine according to feature B8, characterized by comprising a function of executing preliminary effect processing by the display control device 81 .

For example, when the predetermined condition is met a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the progress of the specific effect is frequently interrupted due to the execution of the preliminary effect. In this regard, in the present configuration, the extension of the standby effect generated during the specific effect is grasped, and the preliminary effect of the length corresponding to the extension is collectively executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the interruption of the specific effect due to the preliminary effect, and it is possible to preferably prevent the player from understanding the development of the effect.

Feature B10. The preliminary production execution means is
a first means for executing the preliminary effect in a game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a second means for executing the preliminary effect in the game during the waiting period after the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied;
with
When the situation when the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first situation, the preliminary performance is executed by the first means, and the situation when the predetermined condition is satisfied is the second situation different from the first situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that the preliminary effect is executed by the second means when the game is played.

In the above configuration, whether to execute the preliminary effect in the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied or to execute the preliminary effect after the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied can be switched depending on the situation each time. For example, if switching is performed according to the degree of progress of a specific effect when a predetermined condition is established, the preliminary effect is executed at a good timing of the break in the production, and the specific effect is executed at a bad timing. can be used properly by continuing and postponing the preliminary effect. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the switching is performed according to the type of the specific effect, or a configuration in which the switching is performed according to the number of games from the start of the specific effect.

Feature B11. The preliminary effect executing means executes the preliminary effect by the first means when the effect to be executed as the specific effect in the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first effect, and the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature B10, characterized in that if the effect executed as the specific effect in is a second effect different from the first effect, the preliminary effect is executed by the second means.

According to the above configuration, the switching can be performed according to the degree of progress of the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to select whether to execute the preliminary performance immediately or to wait until a good break point in the performance before executing the preliminary performance, and it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the specific performance due to the preliminary performance. becomes.

Feature B12. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein the preliminary effect for one game has a smaller data capacity than the effect for one game in the specific effect.

With the above configuration, the data for the preliminary effect can be kept small, so that the storage capacity of the storage means for storing the effect data can be saved. The preliminary effect is a preliminary effect when the waiting period is extended and is basically a effect that is not executed. It is possible to suppress the pressure on the storage area of the performance data. In addition, by reducing the data volume of the preliminary performance, it becomes possible to read out in a short time, and it is a preferred mode in terms of the nature of the preliminary performance that is suddenly executed when a predetermined condition is established during the execution of the specific performance. Become.

Feature B13. In a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means, when a predetermined condition (winning a lottery for execution of pseudo omens) is established, the second specific effect is executed over a plurality of games. A second specific effect setting means (function for executing a specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) that is set to be displayed;
Second specific effect execution means for executing the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means (function for executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81) When,
with
Any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the preliminary performance executing means comprises means for not executing the preliminary performance when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the second specific performance. The game machine described.

In order to avoid the fact that the specific result is won immediately at the time of execution of the specific effect, a function of executing a specific effect (second specific effect) not premised on the winning may be provided. This second specific effect is executed irrespective of the waiting period, but if a predetermined condition is established during the execution of the specific effect that is not affected by the waiting period, the preliminary effect is executed in this configuration. It is configured not to As a result, the frequency of setting and executing the preliminary effect can be kept low, and the load of control processing can be reduced.

Feature B14. In a situation where the waiting period is not set by the waiting period setting means, when a predetermined condition (winning a lottery for execution of pseudo omens) is established, the second specific effect is executed over a plurality of games. A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) that is set to be displayed;
Second specific effect execution means for executing the second specific effect by the predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the second specific effect setting means (function for executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81) When,
with
The preliminary effect executing means includes means for executing the preliminary effect when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the second specific effect. game machine.

In order to avoid the fact that the specific result is won immediately at the time of execution of the specific effect, a function of executing a specific effect (second specific effect) not premised on the winning may be provided. This second specific performance is executed irrespective of the waiting period, but even if a predetermined condition is established during the execution of the specific performance not affected by the waiting period, the preliminary performance is executed in this configuration. It is configured to run. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fact that the winning of the specific result is known in advance by the presence or absence of the preliminary performance, and the player's expectation for the ending of the specific performance can be maintained for a long time.

Feature B15. a first device (main controller 101);
a second device (display control device 81) electrically connected to the first device and operated based on a signal from the first device;
with
The first device is
At least, the special determination means, the waiting period setting means, the special state transition means, and the specifying means,
updating means for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period according to the execution of the game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means (function for executing game number updating processing by main controller 101); prepared,
The specifying means prevents execution of updating the number of remaining games by the updating means when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The second device comprises the specific effect setting means, the specific effect executing means and the preliminary effect executing means,
The first device receives a first signal (forecast game number update command, CZ game number update command) corresponding to the update of the number of remaining games by the updating means, or the remaining game by the updating means. An output means (a function of executing command output processing by the main controller 101) for outputting a second signal (forecast game number non-update command, CZ game number non-update command) corresponding to the fact that the number is not updated,
The second device comprises grasping means (display control device) for grasping that the first signal is not output by the output means or that the update of the number of remaining games is not executed based on the output of the second signal. 81 function for executing continuous effect execution processing),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein the preliminary performance executing means executes the preliminary performance based on the grasp result of the grasping means.

In the above configuration, the first device and the second device having the first device as a higher-level device are provided, and the control processing related to the game performance is entrusted to the second device, so that the processing load of the first device can be reduced. becomes possible. However, since the number of remaining games during the waiting period is managed by the first device, there is a possibility that the number of remaining games may be recognized differently between the first device and the second device. There is a concern that the preliminary performance cannot be executed appropriately. In this regard, in this configuration, a first signal indicating that the number of remaining games in the waiting period has been updated or a second signal indicating that the number of remaining games in the waiting period has not been updated is sent from the first device to the second device. It is configured to output In this case, when the predetermined condition is established and the number of remaining games in the standby period is not updated, the first signal is not output or the second signal is output. Therefore, on the second device side, by referring to whether or not the first signal is output or whether the second signal is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the number of remaining games in the standby period has been updated in the first device. can. As a result, discrepancies in recognition of the number of remaining games are suppressed, and even in a configuration in which processing is shared between the first device and the second device, a preliminary effect is appropriately executed for the extension of the waiting period. it becomes possible to

In addition, in this feature, "at least one of the first signal and the second signal includes information on the number of remaining games, or the output means includes means for outputting a third signal including information on the number of remaining games. You may further provide the structure of "included." According to this configuration, even if there is a discrepancy, it is possible to correct the discrepancy in the second device based on the first signal, the second signal, or the third signal.

Feature B16. When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the number of games remaining in the waiting period is updated based on the fact that the game is started with the number of bets set to the first number (3). update means (function for executing game number update processing by main control device 101),
The identifying means prevents execution of updating the number of remaining games by the updating means when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The predetermined condition is that the game is started with the bet number set to a second number (2) different from the first number. game machine.

In this configuration, the standby period may or may not be extended depending on the number of bets when playing the game. For example, in a situation where the player is inserting game media for maintenance, the player intended to start the game by inserting the first number of game media, but unintentionally started the game by inserting the second number. It can happen often. In this case, it is conceivable to warn the player and urge him not to start the game with the second number, but there is a risk that the player's interest will be distracted and it will be difficult to concentrate on the specific effect. be. In this respect, in the present configuration, any one of the features B1 to B15 is applied to the extension of the waiting period based on the player's operation, and the game machine side takes measures. As a result, the player's operation error (mistake in the number of bets) is allowed, so that the player can enjoy the specific effect without worrying about the number of bets.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B16, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of variable display areas (each visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied. areas of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R);
First opportunity (winning the pseudo omen execution lottery in the first and second embodiments, CZ mode lottery, AT mode lottery, AT mode game number lottery in the third to fifth embodiments) Winning) is established and a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (CZ mode lottery, AT mode lottery, AT mode game number addition lottery in the first and second embodiments) A specific effect (continuous effect) is executed by a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) in each of the cases in which the pseudo omen execution lottery in the third to fifth embodiments is won. a specific effect execution means (function for executing a continuous effect setting process, a specific combination notification process, and a continuous effect execution process by the display control device 81);
with
The specific effect is executed over a period in which a game is played a plurality of times in which the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas and then the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas. and
The specific effect execution means is
Predetermined conditions during the execution of the specific effect (when the game is started with the number of bets set to 2 in the first and second embodiments, and when the game is started with a bet number of 2 in the first and second embodiments) is established, continuation determination means for determining whether or not to continue the specific effect being executed (the function of executing the effect setting process during bonus by the display control device 81 according to the first and second embodiments , a function of executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81 according to the third to fifth embodiments);
When the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to continuing the specific effect, a first means (for pseudo precursors in the first and second embodiments) for continuing the specific effect being executed Function to continue the continuous effect when the state shifts to the second BB state during the execution of the continuous effect, and when the 2-bet game is started during the execution of the continuous effect for the present sign in the third to fifth embodiments function to continue continuous production) and
A second means (this In the third to fifth embodiments, the 2-bet game is started during the execution of the continuous performance for the pseudo-omen. A function to stop continuous production when
with
The continuation determination means determines to continue the specific effect when the specific effect being executed is executed based on the establishment of the first opportunity, and determines that the specific effect being executed is the second effect. If it is executed based on the establishment of the second opportunity, the means for determining not to continue the specific effect (the function of executing the processing of step S2701 by the display control device 81 in the first and second embodiments, A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of step S3202 by the display control device 81 in the third to fifth embodiments).

In the above configuration, the specific effect is executed over a plurality of games each time the first opportunity is established and the second opportunity is established. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific performance, the specific performance is continued if the specific performance is based on the establishment of the first opportunity, and the specific performance is continued if the specific performance is based on the establishment of the second opportunity. is canceled or interrupted. Therefore, it is possible for the player to determine which of the first opportunity and the second opportunity has been established depending on whether or not the specific effect is continued when the predetermined condition is established. As a result, it is possible to provide a new game of enjoying the development of the specific performance and to enjoy whether or not the specific performance continues, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature C2. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (won a trigger role in the shift lottery), a special state that is advantageous to the player (CZ mode, AT mode, addition of the number of games in AT mode) is generated. Special judgment means for executing judgment (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by main controller 101);
After the determination result of the special determination becomes a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, a predetermined transition condition (the number of remaining games in the precursor mode becomes 0, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is a special state transition means for shifting the game state to the special state (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) when the condition of becoming 0 and winning the AT mode transition trigger role is established;
with
The first opportunity is that a predetermined specific condition (winning a pseudo-prediction execution lottery) is established in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state,
The second trigger is that the determination result of the special determination becomes the specified result, or a predetermined execution condition based on the specified result (CZ mode, AT mode, winning a lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the winning in the execution lottery for the continuous performance for the present omen performed based on is established.

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination based on the establishment of the predetermined determination trigger becomes the specific result, the game state shifts to the special state or becomes a transitionable state (a state that shifts due to the establishment of the transition condition). . Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific effect triggered by the fact that the judgment result of the special judgment becomes the specific result or the predetermined execution condition based on the specific result is satisfied (second trigger) When the specific performance being executed is canceled or interrupted and a prescribed condition is satisfied during the specific performance by a chance (first chance) not based on the winning of the specific result, the specific performance is continued as it is. Therefore, it is possible for the player to determine that the specific result is won when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, and that the specific result is not won when the specific effect is continued. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which it is possible to know whether the specific performance is continued or not without waiting for the end of the specific performance.

Feature C3. When the determination result of the special determination becomes the specific result, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification corresponding to the winning of the specific result is on standby over a plurality of games. waiting period setting means (a function of executing a precursor mode setting process and a second game number management process (a process of setting a CZ counter) by the main controller 101) capable of setting a period (precursor mode, CZ mode);
updating means for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period according to the execution of the game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101); ,
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a predetermined transition condition (AT mode transition trigger role is won) ) is established, a special game state transition means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) for shifting the game state to the special state;
with
Specifying to shift to a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the updating of the number of remaining games by the updating means is not executed over a plurality of games when a predetermined event (establishment of a 2nd BB prize) occurs State transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the predetermined condition is occurrence of the predetermined event or transition to the specific state.

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination becomes a specific result, a waiting period is set, and winning notification and transition to the special state are waited until the waiting period elapses. As a result, an effect period from the winning of the specific result to the transition to the notification of winning or the special information is ensured, and the specific effect can be executed using the period. In addition, in this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, a transition is made to a specific state in which the number of remaining games in the standby period is not updated over a plurality of games. Therefore, if the game transitions to the specific state during execution of the specific effect based on the winning of the specific result, the ending game of the waiting period will be greatly delayed. In this case, it is conceivable to lengthen the specific effect by the amount of the specific state, but since the execution period of the specific state itself is long, it gives the player the impression of being dull, which is not preferable. It is also conceivable to fill in the blanks with an effect different from the specific effect, but it is necessary to create the effect required for that, and there is a risk of increasing the burden on game machine design. In this regard, in this configuration, if the specific state is changed during the execution of the specific effect based on the winning of the specific result, the specific effect will be canceled or suspended, so consideration should be given to the delay in the waiting period due to the transition to the specific state can be made unnecessary. On the other hand, in the case of a specific effect that is not based on winning a specific result, it is not affected by the waiting period, so if a transition to a specific state occurs during that time, there is no problem in continuing the specific effect. . In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide a game in which it is possible to know whether the game is successful or not based on whether or not the specific effect is continued, and in terms of the relationship with the waiting period, it is possible to make it a preferable mode.

Feature C4. When the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means, the third means (in the first and second embodiments, The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S2201, S2215, and steps S2207 to S2212 by the display control device 81.

In the above configuration, since the specific effect is executed after the specific state ends, the player can be properly notified of the winning even if the specific effect is canceled or interrupted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the transition to the special state in a state in which it is not clear whether or not the specific result is won. In addition, in the above case, the specific effect is executed in the remaining waiting period after the specific state ends, so it is possible to preferably synchronize the waiting period and the specific effect.

Feature C5. The second means interrupts the specific effect being executed when the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to not continuing the specific effect,
The third means is characterized by comprising means for resuming the continuation of the interrupted specific effect after the specific state ends when the specific effect is interrupted by the second means. The gaming machine described in C4.

In the above configuration, since the continuation of the interrupted specific effect is resumed after the specific state ends, winning can be announced in the specific effect at the time of resuming. In addition, since it is avoided that the specific effect ends in the middle, for example, when the execution frequency of the premium effect is low and the specific effect is highly rare, the specific effect is given to the player until the end. be able to show.

Feature C6. The second means stops the specific effect being executed when the determination result of the continuation determination means is a result corresponding to not continuing the specific effect,
The third means is means (first and the function of executing the processing of steps S2201, S2215, and steps S2207 to S2212 by the display control device 81 in the second embodiment). .

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is canceled by the second means, the specific effect is executed again after the specific state is ended, so that the winning notification can be performed in the specific effect. At that time, since a new specific effect is executed according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends, it is possible to preferably synchronize the new specific effect and the waiting period.

Feature C7. The specific effect executing means includes third means for executing the specific effect after execution of the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means,
The third means starts the specific effect before the end of the specific state, and executes the specific effect after the end of the specific state (step S4001 to step S4001 by the display control device 81 in the fifth embodiment). A gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C6, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S4008.

Depending on the timing of transition to the specific state, the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends may be small. In this case, it may become difficult to execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games. It is conceivable to provide a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, but there is a concern that the processing load required for switching will increase and the burden on designing due to the creation of the dedicated effect will increase. In this regard, in this configuration, since the specific effect is started before the specific state ends, even if the number of remaining games in the waiting period is small, the number of games for executing the specific effect can be secured. As a result, it is possible to appropriately suppress the inability to properly execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games, the increase in the processing load associated with the dedicated effect, and the increase in the design load. It becomes possible to execute the specific production of.

Feature C8. The third means is means for starting the specific effect before the end of the specific state (step S4001 by the display control device 81 A gaming machine according to feature C7, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of

In the above configuration, whether or not to start the specific state before the specific state ends is switched according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the specific effect from being started early in a situation where the number of remaining games in the waiting period is large, and the specific effect from being unnecessarily lengthened, giving the player a sense of slowness.

In addition, the present feature further includes a configuration that ``if the number of remaining games in the waiting period ascertained by the remaining game number ascertaining means is greater than the predetermined number, the specific effect is started after the specific state ends''. good too.

Feature C9. Special judgment means (main controller) for executing a special judgment as to whether or not a special state advantageous to the player (CZ mode, AT mode, addition of the number of AT mode games) is to be generated based on a predetermined judgment opportunity. 101 function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing);
After the determination result of the special determination becomes a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, a predetermined transition condition (the number of remaining games in the precursor mode becomes 0, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is a special state transition means for shifting the game state to the special state (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101) when the condition of becoming 0 and winning the AT mode transition trigger role is established;
with
The first trigger is that the determination result of the special determination becomes the specified result, or a predetermined execution condition based on the specified result (CZ mode, AT mode, winning a lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode Election to the execution lottery of continuous production for this omen performed based on) is established,
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the second opportunity is fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition (winning a pseudo sign execution lottery) in a situation in which the specific result is not a winning state.

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination based on the establishment of the predetermined determination trigger becomes the specific result, the game state shifts to the special state or becomes a transitionable state (a state that shifts due to the establishment of the transition condition). . Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific effect triggered by the fact that the judgment result of the special judgment becomes the specific result or the predetermined execution condition based on the specific result is satisfied (first trigger) , the specific performance is continued as it is, and the specific performance being executed is canceled or interrupted when a prescribed condition is satisfied during the specific performance by a chance (second chance) not based on the winning of the specified result. Therefore, by continuing the specific effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player can determine that the specific result is won, and the player can determine whether or not the specific effect continues without waiting for the end of the specific effect. It becomes possible to provide a game that allows the player to know whether the player has won or not. In addition, by being able to know the winning in advance, it is possible to provide a way of enjoying watching the rest of the specific performance in a state of feeling relieved or immersed in a sense of superiority.

Feature C10. The predetermined condition is that the game is not established when the game is started with the first number (3) bet, and the number of bets is a second number (2) different from the first number. The gaming machine according to feature C9, characterized in that the game is established when the game is started in a state where the player is in a state where the game is held.

According to the above configuration, a predetermined condition can be established by a simple operation of changing the number of bets. can.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the predetermined condition can be established based on the operation of the player.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined condition can be established according to the intention of the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to establish the predetermined condition at the timing when the player wants to establish the condition, and this is a preferable mode in providing a game in which the success or failure can be known by the presence or absence of the continuation of the specific performance. In addition, since the player can select whether or not to satisfy the predetermined condition, it is possible to provide a convenient configuration for the player who does not want to know in advance whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C11, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of variable display areas (each visible through display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied. areas of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R);
Specific opportunity (winning the CZ mode lottery, AT mode lottery, AT mode game number addition lottery in the first to fifth embodiments, CZ mode lottery, AT mode lottery, AT mode game number addition lottery) When the lottery for the execution of the continuous effect is won in the situation where the player has won the lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of the variable display areas, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of the variable display areas. A specific effect setting means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) that sets a specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed over a period in which the game is played multiple times;
Specific effect execution means (executing continuous effect execution processing by display control device 81) for executing specific effect by predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means function) and
In a game machine equipped with
The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the first game (3-bet game) corresponding to the establishment of the first condition (the game is started with the number of bets set to 3) when the first condition is established. When a second condition different from the first condition (2nd BB win in a 2-bet game) is established, a second game (bonus game in the 2nd BB state) corresponding to the establishment of the second condition can be executed. is a possible configuration,
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be executed by the first means (step S601, step S601, Function to execute the processing of step S602, AT lottery processing, AT addition processing, portent mode setting processing (in the case of a 3-bet game, execute AT lottery processing, add the number of games in AT mode, CZ mode, and AT mode) function to set a precursor start command when winning), a function to execute continuous production setting processing by the display control device 81 (a function to execute continuous production setting processing when a precursor start command is received, display control device 81 Equipped with a function to execute special role notification processing)),
The second condition is satisfied after the specific effect is set by the first means, and the second game corresponding to the establishment of the second condition is executed during execution of the specific effect set by the first means. second means for canceling or interrupting the specific effect being executed (in the first to fifth embodiments, when the transition to the second BB state occurs during execution of the continuous effect for this sign, A game machine characterized by comprising a function to stop the continuous performance of.

In the above configuration, when the specific opportunity is established, the specific effect is executed over a plurality of games. In the case where the specific effect is executed based on the specific opportunity established while the game of the first condition is being played, when the second game corresponding to the establishment of the second condition is executed during the execution. , the specific effect is canceled or interrupted. For example, if the specific effect is continuously executed during the second game, it may be unclear whether the game under the first condition is being executed or the game under the second condition is being executed. There is a concern that the player may be confused by erroneously recognizing that a game with one condition is being executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress such confusion of the player, and it is possible to make the configuration easy to play.

Feature D2. When the specific effect set by the first means is canceled or interrupted by the second means based on the execution of the second game during execution of the specific effect, the second game after the cancellation or interruption In the second game, means for executing a predetermined effect (bonus effect) corresponding to the second game and different from the specific effect The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising: a function of executing a bonus effect during the transition period to the second BB state when transitioning to the second BB state during the second BB state.

In the above configuration, when the second game is executed during execution of the specific effect based on the specific opportunity established in the game of the first condition, the predetermined effect corresponding to the second game is executed instead of the specific effect. This clarifies that the game is the second game, and makes it possible to more preferably suppress the player's confusion.

Feature D3. A special determination means (three-bet game) for executing a special determination as to whether or not a special state advantageous to the player (CZ mode, AT mode, addition of the number of games in AT mode) is to be generated based on the establishment of the first condition. In the case, it has a function to execute AT lottery processing and AT addition processing),
The specific trigger is that the determination result of the special determination becomes a specific result (winning in addition to the number of games in CZ mode, AT mode, AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, or the determination of the special determination The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that when the result is the specified result, a winning state is established in a predetermined lottery process (execution lottery for continuous effect).

In the above configuration, the specific effect based on the specific opportunity established in the game of the first condition is executed based on the winning of a specific result or the winning of a predetermined lottery process executed based on the winning. In some cases, the specific effect is canceled or interrupted as the second game is executed during its execution. Therefore, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not the specific result is won, depending on whether or not the specific effect is canceled or interrupted when the second game is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a way of enjoying not only knowing whether the game is successful or not by the end of the specific effect, but also judging whether the game is successful or not by executing the second game during the specific effect.

Feature D4. Even if the determination result of the special determination is the specific result, the transition to the special state is disabled at least during the execution period of the second game,
When the specific effect set by the first means is canceled or interrupted by the second means based on the execution of the second game during execution of the specific effect, the second game after the cancellation or interruption In the second game, a third means (fourth execution The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3308 by the display control device 81 in the form of .

In the above configuration, when the specific result is won, the specific effect for notifying the winning is executed. However, since the transition to the special state is not allowed during execution of the second game, if the second game is executed during execution of the specific effect, the special state is at least equal to the execution period of the second game. State transitions will be delayed. As a result, there is an inconvenience that the transition to the special state takes a long time even though the notification of winning has been made in the specific effect. In this regard, in the present configuration, in the second game started during execution of the specific effect, a predetermined effect is executed in which a predetermined notification corresponding to the non-winning of the specific result is executed. That is, since the performance mode is changed so as to perform the winning notification instead of the winning notification, even if the period in which the special state is not shifted continues after the completion of the performance, the performance contradiction does not occur. Therefore, the occurrence of the inconvenience described above can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the player's confidence in the performance.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the predetermined effect is executed as a continuation of the specific effect stopped or interrupted by the second means.

In the above configuration, the predetermined effect is executed as a continuation effect of the specific effect that has been canceled or interrupted, so that the player can see that the effect has been switched to the predetermined notification (departure notification) during the specific effect. can be made difficult. As a result, it is possible to ensure consistency with the fact that there is a period during which the transition to the special state does not occur after the end of the presentation.

Feature D6. When a predetermined specific condition (winning the execution lottery for the pseudo omen) is established in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state, the second specific effect (continuous effect for the pseudo omen) is performed over a plurality of games. A second specific effect setting means (function for executing specific contract notification processing by the display control device 81) that is set to be performed;
Second specific effect execution means (processing for continuous effect execution by display control device 81) for causing said second specific effect to be executed by said predetermined effect means based on the setting result of said second specific effect setting means functions to perform) and
with
The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5, wherein the third means includes means for executing part of the second specific effect as the predetermined notification or the predetermined effect.

In the above configuration, the second specific effect for notifying the winning is executed in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state. Then, when the predetermined effect is executed when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, part of the second specific effect is diverted as the predetermined notification or the predetermined effect. Therefore, the specific performance before cancellation or interruption and the prescribed performance after cancellation or interruption can be connected without difficulty, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the performance has been switched to the performance for notifying failure in the middle of the specific performance. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably secure consistency with the occurrence of a period in which the transition to the special state does not occur after the end of the effect. Moreover, since part of the second specific effect is diverted, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect as a predetermined effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated presentation, and furthermore it is possible to save the capacity of the storage means for storing the presentation data.

Feature D7. The specific effect setting means includes game number setting means for setting the number of games to be executed for the specific effect,
When the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means based on the execution of the second game during execution of the specific effect set by the first means, the number of remaining games of the specific effect Equipped with a grasping means for grasping
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, wherein the third means does not execute the predetermined effect when the number of remaining games ascertained by the ascertaining means is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games.

When the specific effect has progressed to some extent, the player may generally recognize the win. If such a player switches to the predetermined effect for notifying the win while the player is almost aware of the win, there is a concern that the player will be resented and will lose interest in the specific effect. In this regard, in this configuration, when a specific effect is canceled or interrupted, the number of remaining games is grasped as the progress of the specific effect, and when the grasped number of remaining games is equal to or less than a predetermined number, a predetermined effect is executed. It is configured not to In other words, instead of executing a predetermined effect uniformly, it is determined whether or not to execute a predetermined effect depending on the number of remaining games. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest in the specific effect due to switching to the predetermined effect.

Feature D8. As the specific effects, at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect are provided,
When the second game is executed while the first specific effect is being executed, the second means stops or interrupts the first specific effect being executed, and cancels or interrupts the first specific effect being executed, and The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, further comprising means for continuing the second specific effect even after the second game is started when the second game is executed.

In the above configuration, when the second game is executed while the specific effect is being executed, whether the specific effect is stopped, interrupted, or continued is switched depending on the type of the specific effect. Therefore, for example, when a specific effect such as a premium effect is executed infrequently and is highly valuable to the player, the specific effect can be continued even if the second game is executed.

In this feature, "the second specific effect is executed less frequently than the first specific effect" or "the second specific effect has a longer number of games to be executed than the first specific effect." It may further include the configuration "there is".

Feature D9. When the specific opportunity is established, a notification execution means capable of executing a specific notification different from the specific performance (such as establishment of a continuous performance execution opportunity and notification suggesting that the continuous performance is being executed) with
When the second game is executed while the specific notification and the specific effect are being executed, the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted by the second means, while the specific notification is continued. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that it is configured to allow

In the above configuration, when the specific trigger is established, the specific notification is executed separately from the specific effect. Then, when the second game is executed while the specific notification and the specific effect are being executed, the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, while the specific notification is continued. Therefore, even in a situation where the specific performance is canceled or interrupted, it is possible to know that the specific result is actually won by seeing the specific notification, and the game after the cancellation or interruption is given a sense of expectation. becomes possible.

In addition, in this feature, "specific notification different from the specific effect" means "specific notification different from the specific effect and corresponding to establishment of the specific trigger" or "different from the specific effect , and can also be expressed as "a specific notification that the player can recognize or guess the establishment of the specific opportunity".

Feature D10. The specific notification is performed by display,
It is characterized by comprising means for continuing the specific notification at the same display position as the display position of the specific notification immediately before the cancellation or interruption when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means. The gaming machine according to feature D9.

In the above configuration, the display position of the specific notification is not changed before and after the specific effect is stopped or interrupted. This makes it easier for the player to notice the role of the specific notification (substantial winning notification), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by losing sight of the specific notification after the stop or interruption.

For each configuration of the features D1 to D10, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (won a trigger role in the shift lottery), a special state that is advantageous to the player (CZ mode, AT mode, addition of the number of games in AT mode) is generated. Special judgment means for executing judgment (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by main controller 101);
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state, a specific effect (continuous effect) for specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) corresponding to the winning of the specific result ) to be executed over a plurality of games (a function of setting the information of the precursor scenario in the scenario data table by the display control device 81);
Specific effect executing means (display control unit) for executing the specific effect by predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table) A function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the device 81);
At least when a predetermined condition (that the BB win is established, that the game is started with the number of bets set to 2) is established during the execution of the specific effect, the transition game to the special state or the transition to the special state a specific means for delaying the game in which the
Changing means for changing the effect mode of the specific effect so that a predetermined notification (defeat effect, success/failure effect, draw effect) different from the specific effect is performed when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect. (The function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3308 by the display control device 81 according to the fourth embodiment. When a 2-bet game is played, a notification corresponding to the loss is once performed, and then a resurrection effect is performed. function to change the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a predetermined judgment opportunity is established, a special judgment is executed as to whether or not to bring about a special state advantageous to the player. Then, when the determination result of the special determination becomes a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, a specific effect for performing a specific notification corresponding to the winning of the specific result is executed over a plurality of games. . Further, in this configuration, when a predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect, the transition game to the special state or the game in which the transition to the special state is possible is delayed. However, since the specific effect is set based on the state before the transition game or the like is delayed, if the transition game or the like is delayed as described above, the specific notification (winning notification) is issued in the specific effect. In spite of the fact that it has been performed, there may be a problem that the transition to the special state takes time. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's trust in the performance will be lowered, and the specific performance cannot be continued. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined condition is established during execution of a specific effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that a predetermined notification different from the specific notification is performed, so that the transition to the special state does not occur after the end of the effect. Even if the period continues, it is possible to suitably suppress the production contradiction. Therefore, even if the transition game or the like to the special state is delayed during the specific effect, the specific effect can be continued.

In addition, the present feature may further include a configuration that ``the specific effect setting means sets the specific effect so that at least the specific notification is executed before the transition to the special state''. .

In addition, in this feature, as a premise configuration, "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied. 26L, 26M, and areas of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible through 26L), variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. A gaming machine in which a game is played as one game when the is stopped."

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined notification is notification (defeat effect, success/failure effect) corresponding to non-winning of the specific result.

In the above configuration, since the specific performance is continued with the notification corresponding to non-winning (loss notification) instead of the specific notification (winning notification), the player can be made to think that the game is lost. As a result, even if there is a period in which the transition to the special state continues after the end of the production, the consistency with the production is maintained, and even if there is a delay in shifting to the special state during the execution of the specific production, the specific production can be continued. be possible.

Feature E3. Said change means, during execution of said specific effect, before the execution of the specific notification (e.g., ready-to-win) that the player can recognize or guess that the specific notification or the specific result has been obtained is established, the game machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the predetermined notification is performed.

In this configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before the specific notification is executed in the specific effect, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the predetermined notification is performed. For example, if a predetermined notification is made after a specific notification is made in a specific effect, there is a concern that a contradiction will occur in the specific effect and give an unnatural impression to the player. According to this configuration, since the effect mode is changed within a range in which such contradiction does not occur, the effect of feature E1 or feature E2 can be achieved while suppressing the occurrence of contradiction in the specific effect. becomes possible.

Feature E4. It is characterized by comprising means for canceling or interrupting the specific effect being executed when the predetermined condition is established after the specific notification or the specific notification is executed while the specific effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature E3.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the execution of the specific notification, the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted, so that the execution of the predetermined notification after the execution of the specific notification is avoided, resulting in a contradiction in the specific effect. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of

Feature E5. A plurality of types of specific effects (first continuous effect, second continuous effect) are provided as the specific effect,
The changing means is means for changing the effect mode of the specific effect so that the predetermined notification corresponding to the type of the specific effect set by the specific effect setting means or being executed by the specific effect executing means is performed. (a function of executing the processing of steps S3303 and S3306 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the predetermined notification corresponding to the type of the specific effect being executed is performed. That is, since the predetermined notification is consistent with the type of the specific notification, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the effect has been switched to the one for the failure notification in the middle of the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an unnatural impression, and to ensure consistency with the occurrence of a period during which the transition to the special state does not occur after the end of the presentation.

Feature E6. a first specific effect setting means as the specific effect setting means;
When a predetermined specific condition (winning a lottery for execution of a pseudo omen) is established in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state, the specific effect for the predetermined notification (continuous effect for the pseudo omen) is performed multiple times. A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) that is set to be executed over the
with
The changing means includes means for changing the effect mode so that a part of the specific effect for the predetermined notification is executed as the predetermined notification or as an effect for executing the predetermined notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

In the above configuration, the second specific effect for notifying the winning is executed in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state. Then, when the effect mode of the specific effect is changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during execution of the specific effect, part of the second specific effect is diverted. This second specific effect for notification of loss is originally configured as a specific effect, like the specific effect for specific notification (notice of winning), so the second specific effect is used as the specific effect after change. By doing so, the specific effect before the change and the specific effect after the change can be connected satisfactorily. Therefore, giving an unnatural impression is suppressed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the performance mode of the specific performance has been changed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to believe that the game is out of order, and it is possible to ensure consistency with the occurrence of a period during which the transition to the special state does not occur after the end of the effect. Moreover, since part of the second specific effect is diverted, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect for change. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated presentation, and furthermore it is possible to save the capacity of the storage means for storing the presentation data.

Feature E7. A plurality of types of the first specific effects (a first specific effect and a second specific effect for the main omen) are provided as the first specific effects,
As the second specific effect, a plurality of types of the second specific effect (first specific effect and second specific effect for pseudo signs) corresponding to the types of the first specific effect are provided,
The change means selects the type of the first specific effect set by the first specific effect setting means or being executed by the specific effect executing means as the predetermined notification or an effect for executing the predetermined notification. Characteristic E6 characterized by comprising means for changing the production mode so that a part of the corresponding second specific production is executed (function for executing the processing of step S3303 by the display control device 81) The game machine described.

In the above configuration, when the effect mode of the specific effect is changed, the effect mode of the specific effect is changed using part of the second specific effect corresponding to the type of the specific effect being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the performance has been switched to the performance for notification of failure in the middle of the specific performance, and it is possible to suppress giving the player an unnatural impression.

Feature E8. The first specific effect and the second specific effect are configured such that the content of the effect progresses according to the execution of the game,
Characteristic feature E6, wherein the changing means includes means for changing the effect mode so that a part of the second specific effect corresponding to the continuation of the first specific effect before the change is executed. Or the gaming machine according to feature E7.

In the above configuration, part of the second specific effect corresponding to the continuation of the first specific effect before the change is executed to change the effect mode of the specific effect. can obscure the boundaries of As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the performance has been switched to the performance for notification of failure in the middle of the specific performance, and it is possible to suppress giving the player an unnatural impression.

Feature E9. The specific effect setting means includes game number setting means (function for executing continuous effect setting processing by the display control device 81) for setting the number of games to be executed for the specific effect,
an effect remaining game number grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games of the specific effect when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect,
Characteristic feature E1, wherein the changing means comprises means for not making the change when the number of remaining games ascertained by the number-of-residual-effect ascertaining means is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of E8.

When the specific effect has progressed to some extent, the player may generally recognize the win. Switching to the notification for failure in such a state that the player is almost aware of the hit may cause the player's antipathy and decrease interest in the specific effect. In this regard, in this configuration, when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted, the number of remaining games is grasped as the progress of the specific effect, and when the grasped number of remaining games is equal to or less than a predetermined number, a predetermined notification is sent. It is configured not to execute changes. In other words, instead of uniformly executing the change to the predetermined notification, the presence or absence of the above change is selectively used according to the number of remaining games, so that the execution of the loss notification is suppressed when the player is almost aware of the win. can.

Feature E10. The specifying means, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, is a specified state (second BB state) in which a transition game to the special state or a game in which the transition to the special state is possible is delayed over a plurality of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that it shifts to a corresponding bonus game).

In this configuration, when a predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect, the game moves to the specific state, and the transition to the special state is delayed for a relatively long period of time. If the delay period is long like this, the delay in transition to the special state with respect to the specific notification in the specific effect cannot be neglected. By applying any one of the features E1 to E9 to such a situation, it is possible to suitably deal with delays in migration.

Feature E11. The specific effect setting means resets the specific effect for the specific notification to be executed after the specific state when the change is executed by the changing means (by the display control device 81 The gaming machine according to feature E10, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processes after step S2201, step S2215, and step S2207.

In the above configuration, when the performance mode of the specific performance is changed by the changing means so as not to execute the specific performance, the specific performance is executed after the execution of the specific performance, and the specific performance is performed during the performance. As a result, even if the specific notification is canceled due to the establishment of a predetermined condition during the specific effect, the winning notification can be appropriately given to the player.

Feature E12. When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) is performed multiple times. Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting process by main controller 101, second game number management process (setting CZ counter ), and
updating means for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period according to the execution of the game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101); ,
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a predetermined transition condition (AT mode transition trigger role is elected ) is established, special state transition means for shifting the game state to the special state (function for executing winning result corresponding processing by the main control device 101);
with
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be executed in the waiting period when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means,
The specific state prevents the updating of the number of remaining games by the updating means from being executed over a plurality of games,
The gaming machine according to feature E11, wherein the reset means sets the specific effect for the specific notification to be executed in the remaining waiting period after the specific state. .

In the above configuration, when the specific effect for specific notification is executed after the specific state ends, the specific effect is executed within the remaining waiting period after the specific state ends. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the specific effect after the specific state from being executed beyond the waiting period and the waiting period and the specific effect becoming out of sync.

Feature E13. The gaming machine according to feature E11 or E12, wherein the resetting means comprises means for setting such that the new specific effect for the specific notification is executed after the specific state.

In the above configuration, when the effect mode of the specific effect is changed by the changing means so that the specific notification is not executed, a new specific effect for the specific notification is executed again after the specific state is ended. As a result, the specific performance executed when the prescribed condition is established (the specific performance executed at the time of change) is clearly distinguished from the specific performance after the specific state, and the player is confused by confusing the two. can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E14. The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect for the specific notification to be executed after the specific effect in which the effect mode is changed is completed when the change is executed by the changing means. A setting means is provided,
The resetting means is a specific effect means (fifth embodiment) for starting the specific effect for the specific notification before the end of the specific state and continuing after the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E10 to E13, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S4001 to S4008 by the display control device 81 in the above.

Depending on the timing of transition to the specific state, the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends may be small. In this case, it may become difficult to execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games. It is conceivable to provide a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, but there is a concern that the processing load required for switching will increase and the burden on designing due to the creation of the dedicated effect will increase. In this regard, in this configuration, since the specific effect is started before the specific state ends, even if the number of remaining games in the waiting period is small, the number of games for executing the specific effect can be secured. As a result, it is possible to appropriately suppress the inability to properly execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games, the increase in the processing load associated with the dedicated effect, and the increase in the design load. It becomes possible to execute the specific production of.

In addition, in this feature, ``if the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state, at least the transition to the special state and the specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting process by main controller 101, second game number management process ( CZ counter setting process)); and updating means (main control unit) for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period according to the execution of the game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means. a function of executing a game count update process by the device 101), and when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result. Special state transition means for shifting the game state to the special state when a predetermined transition condition (winning the AT mode transition trigger role) is established (function for executing winning result corresponding processing by main controller 101) and, the specific effect setting means, when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, sets the specific effect to be executed in the waiting period, and the specific state is , the updating of the number of remaining games by the updating means is prevented from being executed over a plurality of games."

Feature E15. When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) is performed multiple times. Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting process by main controller 101, second game number management process (setting CZ counter ), and
updating means for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period according to the execution of the game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101); ,
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a predetermined transition condition (AT mode transition trigger role is elected ) is established, special state transition means for shifting the game state to the special state (function for executing winning result corresponding processing by the main control device 101);
with
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be executed in the waiting period when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means,
The specific state prevents the updating of the number of remaining games by the updating means from being executed over a plurality of games,
When the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the end of the specific state is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the means for the specific effect causes the specific effect for the specific notification to be started before the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature E14, characterized by comprising means for executing the processing of step S4001 by the display control device 81.

In the above configuration, whether or not to start the specific state before the specific state ends is switched according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the specific effect from being started early in a situation where the number of remaining games in the waiting period is large, and the specific effect from being unnecessarily lengthened, giving the player a sense of slowness.

In addition, the present feature further includes a configuration of "when the number of remaining games in the waiting period ascertained by the remaining game number ascertaining means is greater than the predetermined number, the specific effect is started after the specific state is over." good too.

Feature E16. When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect, the changing means performs a game in which the predetermined notification is performed after a predetermined notification (defeat effect, success/failure effect) different from the specific notification is performed. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized by comprising means for changing the performance mode of the specific performance (function of changing to resurrection performance) so that the specific notification is performed in a later game.

In the above constitution, when a predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific performance, a predetermined notification different from the specific notification is once performed, and the performance mode of the specific performance is changed so that winning notification is performed in the subsequent game. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of execution games of the specific effect while avoiding contradiction with the result of the special determination, and it is possible to cope with the delay in transition to the special state.

Feature E17. Characteristic feature E16, characterized in that the specifying means delays the transition game to the special state or the game in which the transition to the special state is possible by one game with respect to the establishment of the predetermined condition once. The gaming machine described in .

In this configuration, the delay in shifting to the special state when the predetermined condition is satisfied is limited to one game. , it becomes possible to delay the specific notification by making the transition to the special state follow the delay.

Feature E18. When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state, at least one of the transition to the special state and the specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) is performed multiple times. Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting process by main controller 101, second game number management process (setting CZ counter ), and
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, the number of games remaining in the waiting period is updated based on the fact that the game is started with the number of bets set to the first number (3). updating means (function for executing processing for updating the number of games by the main control device 101);
When the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or after the update result becomes the predetermined result, a predetermined transition condition (AT mode transition trigger role is elected ) is established, special state transition means for shifting the game state to the special state (function for executing winning result corresponding processing by the main control device 101);
with
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be executed in the waiting period when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means,
The specifying means prevents execution of updating the number of remaining games by the updating means when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The game according to feature E16 or feature E17, wherein the predetermined condition is that the game is started with the number of bets set to a second number (2) different from the first number. machine.

In this configuration, the transition to the special state may or may not be delayed depending on the number of bets when playing the game. For example, in a situation where the player is inserting game media for maintenance, the player intended to start the game by inserting the first number of game media, but unintentionally started the game by inserting the second number. It can happen often. In this case, it is conceivable to warn the player and urge him not to start the game with the second number, but there is a risk that the player's interest will be distracted and it will be difficult to concentrate on the specific effect. be. In this regard, in this configuration, the configuration of feature E16 or feature E17 is applied to such a delay in transition based on the player's operation, and the game machine side takes measures. As a result, the player's operation error (mistake in the number of bets) is allowed, so that the player can enjoy the specific effect without worrying about the number of bets.

For each configuration of the features E1 to E18, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. When a predetermined specific condition (CZ mode, AT mode, winning with the addition of the number of games in AT mode) is established, a specific effect (continuous effect) to be executed over a plurality of games is set to be performed. Specific effect setting means (function for executing continuous effect setting processing by display control device 81);
Specific effect execution means (function for executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81) for executing the specific effect based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table) )When,
with
The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect to be performed in a specific period (precursor mode, CZ mode) during which the specific effect can be executed,
updating means for updating the number of remaining games in the specific period according to the execution of the game (function for executing game number updating processing by the main control device 101);
A specific means (main controller) for generating a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the updating of the number of remaining games by the updating means is not executed when a predetermined condition (2nd BB winning) is established in the specific period. 101), and
with
The specific effect setting means is configured to perform the specific effect using the remaining specific period after the end of the specific state. function to execute the production setting process),
The first means is the second means (the processing of steps S4001 to S4008 by the display control device 81) that causes the specific effect to be started before the end of the specific state and is executed after the end of the specific state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute

In the above configuration, when the specific condition is established, the specific effect is set to be executed over a plurality of games. This setting is performed so that the specific effect is executed in a specific period during which the specific effect can be executed. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period, the number of remaining games in the specific period is shifted to a specific state in which the number of remaining games is not updated, and updating of the number of remaining games is interrupted. In such a configuration, for example, when a predetermined condition is established during execution of a specific effect and the game moves to a specific state, there is a case where it is desired to execute the specific effect again after the specific state ends. However, depending on the transition timing to the specific state, the number of remaining games in the specific period after the specific state ends may be small. In this case, it may become difficult to execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games. It is also conceivable to provide a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, but there is a concern that this will increase the processing load required for switching and increase the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated effect. In this regard, in this configuration, the specific effect is started prior to the end of the specific state, so it is possible to secure a larger number of games than the actual number of remaining games as the number of games in which the specific effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inability to properly execute specific effects due to a lack of games, the increase in processing load associated with dedicated effects, and the increase in design load. It becomes possible to suitably implement the continuous effect used.

In this feature, the premise configuration is "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the design is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied. 26L, 26M, and areas of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible through 26L), variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. A gaming machine in which a game is played as one game when the is stopped."

Feature F2. The second means comprises means (display control device) for starting the specific effect before the end of the specific state when the number of remaining games in the specific period after the end of the specific state is equal to or less than a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S4001 by 81).

In the above configuration, whether or not to start the specific state before the specific state ends is switched according to the number of remaining games in the specific period after the specific state ends. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the specific effect from being started early in a situation where the number of remaining games in the specific period is large, and the specific effect from being unnecessarily lengthened, giving the player a sense of sluggishness.

Feature F3. Characteristic feature F2, further comprising means for starting the specific effect after the specific state ends when the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining game number ascertaining means is greater than the predetermined number. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, even when the number of remaining games in the specific period is sufficiently secured after the specific state ends, the specific effect is prevented from starting before the specific state ends. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the player from feeling that the specific effect is lengthened unnecessarily and that the player feels bored.

Feature F4. The second means is
With reference to the remaining status of the specific state (the number of remaining bonus games, the remaining number of payouts up to the maximum payout number) or the progress status (the number of bonus games completed, the number of payouts from the start of the bonus game), the current game is Start determination means (function for executing the process of step S4002 by the display control device 81) for determining whether or not the start game is to start the specific effect;
means for starting the specific effect when the start determination means determines that it is the start game (function for executing the processes of steps S4002 to S4008 by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized by comprising:

In the case of starting the specific effect before the end of the specific state, for example, if the start timing of the specific effect is too early, the specific effect ends earlier than the remaining specific period after the specific state passes, or the reverse If the start timing of the specific effect is too late, the specific effect may exceed the specific period. In this respect, in this configuration, the number of remaining games in the specific state is specified or estimated by referring to the remaining state or progress state in each specific state, and the start timing of the specific effect is determined based on the result. As a result, the specific effect can be started at an appropriate timing in relation to the number of remaining games in the specific state, and the specific effect suitable for both the number of remaining games in the specific state and the number of remaining games in the specific period is preferably performed. it becomes possible to

Feature F5. the specific state is a bonus game in which an upper limit of the number of game media to be paid out is set;
The second means comprises means for starting the specific effect in the final game of the bonus game (function for executing the processes of steps S4002 to S4008 by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4.

In a bonus game that ends with the condition that the number of game media paid out reaches the upper limit number of payouts, the number of games to be played (the transition period to the bonus state) is not unequivocally determined, but the role in the bonus game is determined. When a lottery is won, if the number of payouts of game media determined corresponding to the winning combination is equal to or more than the remaining number of payouts up to the maximum number of payouts, the game is identified as the final game of the bonus game. be able to. In other words, although the estimation of the remaining 2 or 3 games may be less reliable, the final game can be accurately specified. Therefore, if the continuous effect is started in the final game in the specific state, the specific effect can be executed in a state in which one game is surely added to the number of remaining games in the specific period. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the number of games executed with the specific effect, but also to preferably synchronize the specific effect with the specific period.

Feature F6. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (won the transition lottery trigger role), a special condition as to whether or not a special state advantageous to the player (CZ mode, AT mode, addition of the number of AT mode games) is generated. Special judgment means for executing judgment (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by main control device 101),
The specific condition is that the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state,
The first means is arranged so that the specific effect for specific notification (victory effect, transformation success effect) corresponding to the winning of the specific result is executed using the remaining specific period after the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that it

In the above configuration, the specific effect is executed using the remaining specific period after the specific state, and the specific notification corresponding to the winning of the specific result is executed. Therefore, for example, even if the specific state is changed during execution of the specific effect and the specific notification is obstructed, it is possible to properly notify the player of the winning.

Feature F7. The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect for the specific notification to be performed during the specific period,
When the specific period has passed, or when a predetermined transition condition (electing the AT mode transition trigger role) is established after the specific period has passed, a special state transition that shifts the game state to the special state Means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
Means (first, second, fourth, fifth) for canceling the specific effect being executed when the predetermined condition is established during the execution of the specific effect started before the transition to the specific state A function of executing continuous effect execution processing by the display control device 81 according to the embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the game state is shifted to the special state after the specific period has passed or when the predetermined transition condition is established after the specific period has passed. Under such a configuration, when the specific period is extended due to the establishment of the predetermined condition, the execution timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are shifted. For this reason, there is a possibility that the transition to the special state may take some time even though the winning has been notified by the specific notification, and there is a concern that the player's confidence in the performance will be lowered. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined condition is met during execution of the specific effect started before transition to the specific state, the specific effect is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the transition to the special state takes time even though the specific notification has been made. In this case, the specific notification is not executed in the specific effect started before the transition to the specific state, but the specific effect is executed again using the remaining period after the specific state, and the specific notification is performed in it. will be Therefore, even if the previous specific effect is canceled, the player can be appropriately informed of the winning.

Feature F8. The specific effect setting means sets the specific effect for the specific notification to be performed during the specific period,
When the specific period has passed, or when a predetermined transition condition (electing the AT mode transition trigger role) is established after the specific period has passed, a special state transition that shifts the game state to the special state Means (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main control device 101);
Modification to change the performance mode of the specific performance so that a predetermined notification (defeat performance, transformation failure performance) corresponding to the non-winning of the specific result is performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific performance. The gaming machine according to feature F6 or feature F7, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3308 by the display control device 81 according to the fourth embodiment).

In the above configuration, the game state is shifted to the special state after the specific period has passed or when the predetermined transition condition is established after the specific period has passed. Under such a configuration, when the specific period is extended due to the establishment of the predetermined condition, the execution timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are shifted. For this reason, there is a possibility that the transition to the special state may take some time even though the winning has been notified by the specific notification, and there is a concern that the player's confidence in the performance will be lowered. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined condition is established during the execution of the specific effect started before the transition to the specific state, a predetermined notification (loss notification) corresponding to non-winning of the specific result is performed. The effect mode of the specific effect is changed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the game is out of order, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of contradiction in performance even if the period in which the transition to the special state does not occur continues after the end of the performance. In this case, the specific notification is not executed in the specific effect started before the transition to the specific state, but the specific effect is executed again using the remaining period after the specific state, and the specific notification is performed in it. will be Therefore, even if the effect mode is changed so that the specific effect is not executed in the previous specific effect, the player can be properly informed of the winning.

Feature F9. a first specific effect setting means as the specific effect setting means;
When a predetermined condition (winning a lottery for execution of a pseudo omen) is established in a situation where the specific result is not a winning state, the specific effect for the predetermined notification (continuous effect for the pseudo omen) is performed a plurality of times in the game. A second specific effect setting means (a function of executing a specific contract notification process by the display control device 81) that is set to be executed over a period of time;
The changing means changes the effect mode so that a part of the specific effect for the predetermined notification is executed as the predetermined notification or as an effect for executing the predetermined notification. The game machine described.

In the above configuration, the specific effect for notifying the winning is executed in a situation where the winning state of the specific result is not obtained. Then, when the effect mode of the specific effect is changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during the execution of the specific effect, a part of the specific effect for notifying the deviation is diverted. This specific effect for notification of loss was originally configured as a specific effect, just like the specific effect for specific notification (notification of winning), so the specific effect for notification of loss is used as the specific effect after change. By doing so, the specific effect before the change and the specific effect after the change can be connected satisfactorily. Therefore, giving an unnatural impression is suppressed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the performance mode of the specific performance has been changed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to believe that the game is out of order, and it is possible to ensure consistency with the occurrence of a period during which the transition to the special state does not occur after the end of the effect. Moreover, since a part of the specific effect for notification of deviation is diverted, it is not necessary to provide a special effect for change. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the design burden associated with the creation of the dedicated presentation, and furthermore it is possible to save the capacity of the storage means for storing the presentation data.

Feature F10. The game according to any one of features F7 to F9, wherein the second means comprises means for executing the new specific effect using the remaining specific period after the specific state ends. machine.

In the above configuration, as the specific effect using the remaining specific period after the end of the specific state, a new specific effect is executed for the specific state started before the transition to the specific state. As a result, the specific performance executed when the predetermined condition is established is clearly distinguished from the specific performance using the remaining specific period after the specific state, and the player is preferably confused by confusing the two. can be suppressed.

Feature F11. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the specific state is executed over a plurality of games.

In this configuration, when a predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect, the game moves to the specific state, and the transition to the special state is delayed for a relatively long period of time. If the delay period is long like this, the delay in transition to the special state with respect to the specific notification in the specific effect cannot be neglected. By applying any one of the features F1 to F10 to such a situation, it becomes possible to suitably deal with the delay in transition.

Feature F12. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (won the transition lottery trigger role), a special condition as to whether or not a special state advantageous to the player (CZ mode, AT mode, addition of the number of AT mode games) is generated. Special judgment means for executing judgment (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by main control device 101),
The specific condition is that the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the special state,
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state, a specific notification corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result (victory effect, successful transformation effect) Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting processing by main controller 101, second game number management A function to execute processing (processing to set the CZ counter)),
The specific period is the waiting period,
When the updating result of the updating means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition is established after the updating result becomes the predetermined result, the game state is changed to the special The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F11, characterized by comprising a special state transition means (a function of executing a winning result handling process by the main controller 101) for shifting to a state.

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination based on the establishment of the predetermined determination trigger becomes the specific result, at least one of the transition to the special state advantageous to the player and the specific notification of winning the specific result is performed. A waiting period for waiting is set, and a specific performance is executed in accordance with this waiting period. By applying any one of the features F1 to F11 to such a configuration, it becomes possible to suitably execute the specific effect in relation to the remaining waiting period after the specific state.

For each configuration of the features F1 to F12, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Based on a predetermined judgment opportunity (won a trigger role in the shift lottery), a special state that is advantageous to the player (CZ mode, AT mode, addition of the number of games in AT mode) is generated. Special judgment means for executing judgment (function for executing AT lottery processing and AT addition processing by main controller 101);
When the determination result of the special determination is a specific result corresponding to causing the special state, a specific notification corresponding to the transition to the special state and the winning of the specific result (victory effect, successful transformation effect) Waiting period setting means (precursor mode setting processing by main controller 101, second game number management a function to execute processing (processing to set the CZ counter);
updating means for updating the number of games remaining in the waiting period according to the execution of the game when the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main control device 101); ,
When the updating result of the updating means becomes a predetermined result corresponding to the lapse of the waiting period, or when a predetermined transition condition is established after the updating result becomes the predetermined result, the game state is changed to the special a special state transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing a winning result corresponding process by the main controller 101);
When the waiting period is set by the waiting period setting means, a specific effect (continuous effect) executed over a plurality of games is started in a predetermined game during the waiting period, and the predetermined game is performed in the specific effect. A specific effect setting means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) for setting the specific notification to be executed in a specific game after the game;
Specific effect executing means (display control unit) for executing the specific effect by predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means (information of the present precursor scenario set in the scenario data table) A function of executing a continuous effect execution process by the device 81);
When the first condition (the game is started with the prescribed number of 2) or the second condition (the 2nd BB prize is established) is satisfied at least during the execution of the specific effect, the number of remaining games by the updating means. is not executed (a function of executing a process for updating the number of games by the main controller 101 (in the case of a 2-bet game, the omen counter and CZ counter are not updated during a bonus game));
with
When the second condition is satisfied, the period during which the updating by the updating means is not executed is longer than when the first condition is satisfied,
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect, a first means for continuing the specific effect being executed (for continuous effect execution by the display control device 81 according to the third and fourth embodiments) function to perform processing) and
Second means for canceling or interrupting the specific effect being executed when the second condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect (the effect during the bonus by the display control device 81 in the first to fifth embodiments function to execute setting processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the determination result of the special determination based on the establishment of the predetermined determination trigger becomes the specific result, at least one of the transition to the special state advantageous to the player and the specific notification of winning the specific result is performed. A waiting period to wait is set. During this standby period, the specific effect is executed over a plurality of games, and the specific notification is performed in the specific game during the specific effect. Then, after the waiting period has elapsed or when a predetermined transition condition is met, the game state is transitioned to the special state. In other words, after the specific notification is made in the specific effect and the player is notified of the winning, the game state shifts to a special state or a transitionable state (a state that shifts due to the establishment of the transition condition). ing.

Here, in this configuration, at least when the first condition or the second condition is established during execution of the specific effect, the waiting period is extended, and the ending game of the period is delayed. On the other hand, since the specific effect is set based on the waiting period before the extension, the execution timing of the specific notification in the specific effect and the end of the waiting period are deviated. In this case, in this configuration, when the waiting period is extended during the execution of the specific performance, whether to continue the specific performance being executed, or to stop or interrupt it is selectively used according to the length. . Specifically, if the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect and the waiting period is extended by a short extension period, it is assumed that the deviation of the end of the waiting period from the execution timing of the specific notification is within the allowable range. , Priority is given to continuation of a specific production. On the other hand, when the second condition is established during execution of the specific performance and the waiting period is extended by a long extension period, the specific performance is canceled or interrupted as the deviation cannot be ignored, and the specific notification is not executed. Forcibly terminate as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to expand opportunities for the specific performance to continue, and to suppress occurrence of performance contradiction even if a period in which no transition to the special state continues after the performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to preferably cope with the event that the waiting period is extended during the execution of the specific performance, compared to the configuration of always continuing the specific performance or always canceling or interrupting the specific performance. .

In this feature, the premise configuration is "a plurality of variable display areas (display windows) in which a pattern (design) is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied, and the variable display of the design is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied. 26L, 26M, and areas of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible through 26L), variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, and variable display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. A gaming machine in which a game is played as one game when the is stopped."

Feature G2. The specifying means specifies, when the second condition is satisfied, to move to a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the updating of the number of remaining games by the updating means is not executed over a plurality of games. State transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101),
When the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted by the second means, after the specific state ends, the third means for executing the specific effect in the remaining waiting period (step by the display control device 81 S2201, step S2215, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2207 to S2212).

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means, the specific effect is re-executed after the specific state ends. Since winning notification can be performed in the re-execution specific performance, it is possible to suppress the transition to the special state in a state where it is not clear whether or not the specific result is winning. In addition, in the above case, the specific effect is executed in the remaining waiting period after the specific state ends, so it is possible to preferably synchronize the waiting period and the specific effect.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the third means executes the specific effect so as to perform the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed in the specific effect after the specific state, it is possible to properly notify the player of the winning even when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the second means. can.

Feature G4. The specifying means specifies, when the second condition is satisfied, to move to a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) in which the updating of the number of remaining games by the updating means is not executed over a plurality of games. State transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101),
After the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted by the second means, the third means for executing the specific effect (the display control device 81 according to the fifth embodiment executes the effect setting process during bonus function),
The third means starts the specific effect before the end of the specific state, and executes the specific effect after the end of the specific state (step S4001 to step S4001 by the display control device 81 in the fifth embodiment). A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S4008.

Depending on the timing of transition to the specific state, the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends may be small. In this case, it may become difficult to execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games. It is conceivable to provide a dedicated effect for when the number of remaining games is small, but there is a concern that the processing load required for switching will increase and the burden on designing due to the creation of the dedicated effect will increase. In this regard, in this configuration, since the specific effect is started before the specific state ends, even if the number of remaining games in the waiting period is small, the number of games for executing the specific effect can be secured. As a result, it is possible to appropriately suppress the inability to properly execute the specific effect due to the lack of the number of games, the increase in the processing load associated with the dedicated effect, and the increase in the design load. It becomes possible to execute the specific production of.

Feature G5. The third means is means for starting the specific effect before the end of the specific state (step S4001 by the display control device 81 The gaming machine according to feature G4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of

In the above configuration, whether or not to start the specific state before the specific state ends is switched according to the number of games remaining in the waiting period after the specific state ends. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the specific effect from being started early in a situation where the number of remaining games in the waiting period is large, and the specific effect from being unnecessarily lengthened, giving the player a sense of slowness.

In addition, the present feature may further include a configuration that ``if the number of remaining games in the waiting period grasped by the grasping means is greater than the predetermined number, the specific effect is started after the specific state ends''.

Feature G6. In the first means, after a predetermined notification (defeat effect, success/failure effect) corresponding to non-winning of the specific result is performed, the specific notification is performed in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined notification was performed. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized by comprising means for continuing the specific effect so as to continue.

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued by the first means, the predetermined notification (loss notification) is once performed, and the effect mode of the specific effect is changed so that the winning notification is performed in the subsequent game. As a result, the number of games executed in the specific effect can be favorably increased while preventing the occurrence of contradiction with the result of the special determination by finally performing the specific notification, thereby minimizing the delay in transition to the special state. It becomes possible to correspond.

Feature G7. Any one of the characteristics G1 to G6, wherein the specifying means sets the period during which the number of remaining games is not updated for one time when the first condition is met to be one game. The gaming machine described in .

In this configuration, the delay in shifting to the special state when the first condition is satisfied is limited to one game, so by continuing the specific effect in the case of such a delay, the opportunity for the specific effect to be continued is preferable. can be expanded to Further, by applying the configuration of the feature G6 (configuration for changing to the resurrection effect) to this feature, it is possible to delay the specific notification by following the delay in the transition to the special state.

For each configuration of the features G1 to G7, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a plurality of variable display areas (areas of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26L) in which patterns are variably displayed;
a first operating means (start lever 41) that, when operated, starts variable display of a pattern in each of the variable display areas;
second operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the variable display of the pattern in each of the variable display areas when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the first operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at the valid positions set in the plurality of variable display areas, the number corresponding to the predetermined result a means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of paying out the game media or giving a privilege (virtual game media) corresponding to the payout;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, at least a first game state (advantageous section) and a second game state (normal section) different from the first game state are provided,
Transition means for shifting the game state to the first game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (function for executing advantageous section transition lottery processing and section display first processing by the main control device 101);
Ending means for ending the first game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (function for executing the section display second process by the main control device 101);
When the first game state ends, a specific effect (ending effect) corresponding to the end of the first game state is performed over a plurality of games from before the end of the first game state. A specific effect execution means (a function of executing ending effect setting processing and ending effect execution processing by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments) to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65); ,
specific state means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101) that causes a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) when a predetermined specific condition (2nd BB winning) is established; ,
with
The specific state differs from the first game state or a predetermined state (AT mode) before the specific state occurs in the game media increase rate or the expected net increase per game. ,
The predetermined termination conditions include a predetermined termination condition in which the number of game media increases (increase/decrease number of advantageous section MY) in the first game state reaches the upper limit increase number (2400),
The specific effect executing means starts the specific effect when a predetermined start condition corresponding to the predetermined end condition (the starting timing of the ending effect in a situation where the number of increases is expected to reach the upper limit) is met. (function for executing the second ending effect by the display control device 81) is provided,
When the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect (second ending effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, specific means (sixth, seventh A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of executing a full-stop effect setting process and a bonus effect setting process by the display control device 81 according to the embodiment of 1).

In the above configuration, when the game state shifts to the first game state, the first game state ends when the increased number of game media in the first game state reaches the upper limit increased number. Then, when the first game state ends, a specific effect corresponding thereto is executed over a plurality of games from before the end of the first game state. As a result, the player can recognize that the first game state is over.

However, during execution of a specific effect, a specific state (a state in which the increase rate of game media or the expected net increase per game is different from the first game state or the predetermined state before the specific state occurs in the first game state) After the shift, the pace at which the game medium increases differs from before, so the actual end game in the first game state changes from the end game expected at the start of the specific effect. As a result, the first game state does not end easily even though the specific performance is completed to the end, or the first game state ends before the specific performance is completed to the end. There is a risk. In this regard, in this configuration, when a transition to a specific state occurs during execution of a specific effect, the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed, and the specific effect is the first. It is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion caused by not synchronizing with the 1 game state.

Feature H2. The first game state can cause a transition to a special state (AT mode) advantageous to the player,
The second game state is one in which transition to the special state does not occur,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the predetermined state is the special state.

In the above configuration, the transition to the special state can occur while staying in the first game state. This special state is advantageous to the advantageous player, and game media are likely to increase. Therefore, the predetermined end condition for ending the first game state (the increase in the number of game media in the first game state reaching the upper limit increase) is likely to be satisfied during the execution of the special state, and the specific effect is also possible. Easier to do in a special state. Then, when a transition to the specific state occurs while the specific performance is being executed during the special state, the actual end game of the first game state changes from the end game expected at the start of the specific performance. Become. Such a tendency becomes more conspicuous as the difference between the increase rate of game media or the expected net increase per game between the special state and the specific state increases. In this regard, if a transition to a specific state occurs during execution of a specific effect, the specific effect being executed is canceled or interrupted, so even though the specific effect has been performed to the end, it is difficult to enter the first game state ( It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the special state) not ending or the first game state (special state) ending before the specific performance is completed to the end.

In addition, this feature may further include a configuration that "the specific state has a smaller increase rate of game media or a smaller expected net increase per game than the special state." In this case, the actual end game in the first game state was expected at the start of the specific effect, so the end game is delayed, and the first game state (special state) does not occur even though the specific effect is performed to the end. However, according to the configuration of feature H2, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature H3. a first means as the specifying means;
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, further comprising a second means for executing the specific effect after the specific state ends when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means. .

In the above configuration, since the specific effect is executed after the specific state ends, the player is appropriately notified of the end of the first game state even if the specific effect is canceled or interrupted in the middle. becomes possible.

In addition, the present feature may further include a configuration that "the specific state has a smaller increase rate of game media or a smaller expected net increase per game than the first game state or the predetermined state." In this case, the transition to the specific state causes a delay in finishing the game in the first game state. By applying the feature H3 to such a configuration, the above effect can be obtained favorably.

In addition, in this feature, ``comprising a grasping means for grasping the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number after the end of the specific state'' and ``the second means is provided with the remaining increase number grasped by the grasping means. You may further provide the structure of "executing the said specific production|presentation by the number of games which corresponded." In this case, the specific performance after the specific state can be terminated in accordance with the end timing of the first game state changed by the transition to the specific state, and the specific performance and the first game state can be preferably synchronized. Become.

Feature H4. The second means comprises means for executing an effect corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect stopped or interrupted by the first means as the specific effect to be executed after the end of the specific state. The game machine according to feature H3.

In the above configuration, the continuation of the stopped or interrupted specific effect is executed as the specific effect after the specific state, so it is possible to carry out the specific effect to the end. For example, if the part that the player particularly wants to see in the specific effect is set at the end of the specific effect, the player should consider not establishing a predetermined condition in order to avoid the specific effect being canceled or interrupted. need arises. This makes it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game in the first game state or on the specific effect. In this respect, in this configuration, the continuation of the specific performance stopped or interrupted is restarted after the end of the specific state, so that the specific performance can be carried out to the end even if the prescribed condition is satisfied during the specific performance. Therefore, the player can play the game without being preoccupied with whether or not the predetermined condition is established.

Also, for example, when designing a specific effect in consideration of the end in the middle, the part that will be the culmination of the effect (the part that the game machine designer wants to show to the player or the part that is worth seeing from the player's point of view) There is no choice but to set it at the beginning or middle of the specific production. In this case, it tends to be a specific effect that gives an impression of slump, and it becomes difficult to design the effect in order to gain the support of the player. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the climax portion is set at the end of the specific performance, the performance of the specific performance cannot be canceled due to cancellation or interruption, so that the design of the performance of the specific performance can be facilitated. In other words, not only is it easier for the player to play the game, but it is also possible to contribute to the reduction of the design burden.

Feature H5. A grasping means for grasping the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number after the end of the specific state,
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4, wherein the second means comprises means for executing the specific effect in the number of games corresponding to the remaining increase number grasped by the grasping means. .

Depending on the length of the transition period to the specific state, when the specific performance is resumed from the middle after the end of the specific state, the player cannot understand what has started, and there is a risk of causing confusion for the player. In this regard, in this configuration, since a new specific effect is executed after the specific state, it is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion. Also, when executing a new specific effect after the specific state, the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number after the end of the specific state is grasped, and the number of games according to the remaining increase number is executed. The specific performance after the specific state can be ended in accordance with the end timing of the first game state changed by the transition to the state, and the specific performance and the first game state can be preferably synchronized.

When this feature is applied to feature H4, "the specific state includes a first specific state and a second specific state having a longer transition period than the first specific state, and the second specific state has a longer transition period than the first specific state. When the first specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means, the means continues the specific effect canceled or interrupted by the first means. means for executing a corresponding effect after the end of the specific state; and when the second specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means, the new specific effect is performed. and means for executing an effect after the specific state ends." In this case, it is possible to switch between resuming the subsequent specific effect and executing a new specific effect according to the type of the specific state (the length of the transition period to the specific state).

Feature H6. In the specific effect, a specific notification (notification such as "Congratulations" or "END") that enables the player to recognize the end of the specific effect or the first game state is performed,
When the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect (second ending effect), the specifying means cancels or suspends the specific notification so that the specific notification is not performed in the specific effect being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5.

In the above configuration, in the specific effect, the specific notification that enables the player to recognize the end of the specific effect or the first game state is performed. With this specific notification, the player can recognize that the specific effect or the first game state will end. In this configuration, when the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect, the specific effect is canceled or interrupted so that the specific notification is not performed in the specific effect being executed. As a result, the first game state does not end easily even though the specific performance is completed to the end, or the first game state ends before the specific performance is completed to the end. can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature H3, regarding the "second means", "when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means, the specific effect for the specific notification is terminated. It may be "second means to be executed later". According to such a configuration, even when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted due to the transition to the specific state, the player is appropriately notified that the first game state is terminated by the specific notification in the specific effect executed after the specific state. can let you know.

Feature H7. As the end conditions, a first end condition in which the number of games executed in the first gaming state (the number of games in the advantageous section AG) reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games), and a second end condition as the predetermined end condition. A plurality of said termination conditions are provided including,
The termination means terminates the first game state when any one of the plurality of termination conditions is met,
The specific effect executing means, when a first start condition corresponding to the first end condition (start timing of the ending effect in a situation in which the maximum number of games is expected to be reached) is established, or the predetermined start condition When the second start condition is satisfied, it is configured to start the specific effect,
If the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect (first ending effect) based on the establishment of the first start condition, third means (sixth and seventh The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics H1 to H6, characterized in that it has a function of executing a full stop effect setting process and a bonus effect setting process by the display control device 81 according to the embodiment.

For example, when a transition to a specific state occurs during execution of a specific effect, if the specific effect is always stopped or interrupted, there is a risk that the specific effect will be interrupted frequently. In this regard, in the above-described configuration, the specific effect started based on the satisfaction of the first start condition corresponding to the first end condition (the number of executed games in the first gaming state reaches the upper limit number of games) is specified during execution of the specific effect. Since the specific performance is continued when the transition to the state occurs, it is possible to reduce the frequency of interruption of the specific performance while synchronizing the specific performance and the first game state.

Feature H8. Means for executing a predetermined effect (bonus effect) corresponding to the specific state after the specific effect ends when the specific effect is continued by the third means and the specific effect ends during the specific state. (a function of executing the processing of steps S4705, S4604, and S4605 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the continuation of the specific effect is given priority, the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the specific state) is executed after the specific effect ends. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the transition to the specific state is in progress.

Feature H9. As the end conditions, a first end condition in which the number of games executed in the first gaming state (the number of games in the advantageous section AG) reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games), and a second end condition as the predetermined end condition. includes a plurality of said termination conditions including,
The termination means terminates the first game state when any one of the plurality of termination conditions is met,
If the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, determination means (of the seventh implementation) for determining whether to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed A function to execute the processing of steps S5101 to S5104 by the display control device 81 according to the form),
The specifying means suspends or suspends the specific effect being executed when the determination means determines to suspend or suspend,
Remaining game number grasping means (according to the seventh embodiment) for grasping the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games when the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition function of executing the processing of step S5101 by the display control device 81),
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the determining means makes the determination with reference to the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining game number ascertaining means.

Even if the second end condition is satisfied before the first end condition is satisfied before the transition to the specific state, as a result of the transition to the specific state, the second end condition is satisfied as a result of the delay. In some cases, the termination condition and the first termination condition are reversed, and the first termination condition is met before the second termination condition. In this configuration, when a transition to a specific state occurs during execution of a specific effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition, the specific effect is canceled or canceled by referring to the number of remaining games until the first end condition is satisfied. Since it is determined whether or not to interrupt, the specific effect can be continued even when a reversal phenomenon occurs, etc., and the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted can be reduced.

Feature H10. When the number of remaining games ascertained by the number-of-remaining-games ascertaining means is smaller than a predetermined number (a number equal to or less than the number of executed bonus games corresponding to the second BB state), the determination means determines that the specific effect being executed The gaming machine according to feature H9, characterized in that it is determined not to stop or interrupt (step S5102).

According to the above configuration, if the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games when the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the second start condition is within a certain range, the specific effect being executed is executed. may continue without cessation or interruption. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature H11. The predetermined number is the number of remaining games up to the upper limit increase number when the specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, and the upper limit increase number due to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature H10, wherein the number is obtained by adding an increase in the number of remaining games up to.

In the above configuration, when the state changes to satisfy the first end condition before the second end condition, the specific effect being executed can be stopped or continued without interruption. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature H12. The gaming machine according to feature H10 or feature H11, wherein the predetermined number is equal to or less than an expected value or an estimated value based on actual performance of the number of games executed in the specific state.

With the above configuration, when the reversal phenomenon occurs within the range of the specific state, that is, when the first game state ends due to reaching the upper limit number of games during the specific state, the specific effect can be continued. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature H13. When it is determined not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed by the determination means, fourth means for continuing the specific effect being executed (function of executing the process of step S5104 by the display control device 81) When,
When the specific effect is continued by the fourth means, means for terminating the continued specific effect according to the first end condition (function of executing the processing of steps S5201 to S5206 by the display control device 81 )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H9 to H12, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the end condition of the specific effect is changed to correspond to the first end condition. That is, since the continued specific effect is ended in accordance with the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games, the continued specific effect can be ended in synchronization with the end of the first game state.

Feature H14. When it is determined not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed by the determination means, fourth means for continuing the specific effect being executed (function of executing the process of step S5104 by the display control device 81) with
When the specific effect is continued by the fourth means, a predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the first end condition (suggesting the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games) or a notification to teach, etc.).

With the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued for the reason of the reversal phenomenon, the player can recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the first end condition, so that the confusion of the player can be suitably suppressed. becomes possible.

When this feature is applied to the above feature H13, it is possible to match the player's recognition by the predetermined notification with the end timing of the continued specific effect, thereby more preferably suppressing the player's confusion. is expected to have the effect of enabling

Feature H15. When the specific effect (second ending effect) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition, a specific notification that enables the player to recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second end condition. (announcement, etc. for suggesting or teaching the number of remaining increases up to the upper limit increase number or the number of remaining games converted from the remaining increase number into the number of games);
When it is determined not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed by the determination means, fourth means for continuing the specific effect being executed (function of executing the process of step S5104 by the display control device 81) When,
means for not executing the specific notification when the specific effect is continued by the fourth means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features H9 to H14, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the specific notification that enables the player to recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second end condition is not executed. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the continued specific effect corresponds to the second end condition, thereby suitably suppressing player confusion.

When this feature is applied to the above feature H13, even if the continued specific effect is ended according to the remaining number of games up to the upper limit number of games, it is possible to suitably suppress the confusion of the player. The effect of becoming Further, the "means for not executing the specific notification" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for not executing the specific notification during the execution of the said continued specific effect".

Feature H16. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H15, wherein the expected net increase per game in the specific state is less than 0.5 or has a negative value.

With the above configuration, the change mode of the game media is slightly increased, not increased, or decreased when the state is shifted to the specific state. In these cases, when a transition to a specific state occurs during execution of a specific effect, it is assumed that the end timing of the first game state (the timing at which a predetermined end condition or second end condition is met) is delayed. By applying any one of the features H1 to H15 to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience caused by the delay in the end timing.

For each configuration of the features H1 to H16, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. As game states, at least a first game state (advantageous section) and a second game state (normal section) different from the first game state are provided,
Transition means for shifting the game state to the first game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (function for executing advantageous section transition lottery processing and section display first processing by the main control device 101);
Ending means for ending the first game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (function for executing the section display second process by the main control device 101);
When the first game state ends, a specific effect (ending effect) corresponding to the end of the first game state is performed over a plurality of games from before the end of the first game state. A specific effect execution means (a function of executing ending effect setting processing and ending effect execution processing by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments) to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65); ,
When a predetermined condition (2nd BB winning is established) is established during execution of the specific effect, continuation determination means (sixth, seventh A function of executing a bonus effect setting process by the display control device 81 according to the embodiment);
If the continuation determination means determines to continue, the specific effect being executed is continued, and if the continuation determination means determines not to continue, the specific means for stopping or interrupting the specific effect being executed. (The function of executing the effect setting process at all stop and the effect setting process during bonus by the display control device 81 according to the sixth and seventh embodiments);
with
As the termination conditions, the first termination condition (the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the upper limit number of games) and the second termination condition (the number of games in the advantageous section MY increases or decreases the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number) a plurality of said termination conditions are provided, including
The termination means terminates the first game state when any one of the plurality of termination conditions is met,
The continuation determination means continues the specific performance being executed when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific performance, and when the specific performance is executed in response to the first end condition. If it is determined that the specific performance is to be executed in response to the second end condition, it is determined not to continue the specific performance being executed.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to the first game state, and the first game state ends when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied. Then, when the first game state ends, a specific effect corresponding thereto is executed over a plurality of games from before the end of the first game state. As a result, the player can recognize that the first game state is over.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of a specific effect, a continuation determination means is provided to determine whether to continue, stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed. there is The continuation judging means continues the specific effect being executed when the end condition of the first game state which triggered the specific effect is the first end condition, and determines whether the first game state which triggered the specific effect is continued. If the end condition is the second end condition, the specific effect being executed is stopped or interrupted. Here, since the specific effect is started on the premise of the situation before the predetermined condition is established, for example, the predetermined condition is the end of the first game state in relation to the end condition of the first game state. If the timing is affected, there is a risk that synchronization between the specific performance and the end timing of the first game state will be disturbed. In such a case, it is preferable to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed in order to suppress the player's confusion. On the other hand, if the specific effect is frequently stopped or interrupted, there is a concern that the specific effect will be interrupted frequently and the effect of the effect will be reduced. In this regard, in this feature, whether or not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed is determined in relation to the predetermined condition that is established during the specific effect and the end condition of the first game state that triggered the specific effect. It is structured to judge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the specific effect from being excessively interrupted while minimizing the influence of the establishment of the predetermined condition.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein when the predetermined condition is met, the number of remaining games until the second end condition is met is increased.

In the above configuration, if the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect, the number of remaining games until the second end condition is satisfied is increased, so the end timing of the first game state is delayed. In such a case, since the specific performance being executed is canceled or interrupted, it is suppressed that the player misunderstands the end timing of the first game state due to the specific performance, and the influence of the establishment of the predetermined condition is suppressed to a minimum. becomes possible.

In addition, this feature is "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of remaining games until the first end condition is satisfied is not increased, and the remaining number of games until the second end condition is satisfied is increased." It can also be expressed as

Feature I3. Specific state transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for shifting to a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) over a plurality of games when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a first means as the specifying means;
a second means for executing the specific effect after the end of the specific state when the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means;
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the specific effect is executed after the specific state ends, the player is appropriately notified of the end of the first game state even if the specific effect is canceled or interrupted in the middle. becomes possible.

Feature I4. The second means comprises means for executing an effect corresponding to the continuation of the specific effect stopped or interrupted by the first means as the specific effect to be executed after the end of the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature I3.

In the above configuration, the continuation of the stopped or interrupted specific effect is executed as the specific effect after the specific state, so it is possible to carry out the specific effect to the end. For example, if the part that the player particularly wants to see in the specific effect is set at the end of the specific effect, the player should consider not establishing a predetermined condition in order to avoid the specific effect being canceled or interrupted. need arises. This makes it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game in the first game state or on the specific effect. In this respect, in this configuration, the continuation of the specific performance stopped or interrupted is restarted after the end of the specific state, so that the specific performance can be carried out to the end even if the prescribed condition is satisfied during the specific performance. Therefore, the player can play the game without being preoccupied with whether or not the predetermined condition is established.

Also, for example, when designing a specific effect in consideration of the end in the middle, the part that will be the culmination of the effect (the part that the game machine designer wants to show to the player or the part that is worth seeing from the player's point of view) There is no choice but to set it at the beginning or middle of the specific production. In this case, it tends to be a specific effect that gives an impression of slump, and it becomes difficult to design the effect in order to gain the support of the player. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the climax portion is set at the end of the specific performance, the performance of the specific performance cannot be canceled due to cancellation or interruption, so that the design of the performance of the specific performance can be facilitated. In other words, not only is it easier for the player to play the game, but it is also possible to contribute to the reduction of the design burden.

Feature I5. comprehension means for comprehending the number of remaining games until the second end condition is satisfied when the specific effect is executed by the second means;
The game according to feature I3 or feature I4, wherein the second means comprises means for executing the new specific effect in the number of games corresponding to the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means. machine.

Depending on the length of the transition period to the specific state, when the specific performance is resumed from the middle after the end of the specific state, the player cannot understand what has started, and there is a risk of causing confusion for the player. In this regard, in this configuration, since a new specific effect is executed after the specific state, it is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to suitably suppress the player's confusion. In addition, when executing a new specific effect after the specific state, the number of games remaining until the second end condition is satisfied is grasped, and the game is executed with the number of games corresponding to the grasped remaining number of games. The specific performance after the specific state can be ended in accordance with the end timing of the first game state changed by the transition to the state, and the specific performance and the first game state can be preferably synchronized.

Note that when this feature is applied to the feature I4, "the specific state includes a first specific state and a second specific state having a longer transition period than the first specific state, and the second specific state has a longer transition period than the first specific state. When the first specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means, the means continues the specific effect canceled or interrupted by the first means. means for executing a corresponding effect after the end of the specific state; and when the second specific state occurs during execution of the specific effect and the specific effect is canceled or interrupted by the first means, the new specific effect is performed. and means for executing an effect after the specific state ends." In this case, it is possible to switch between resuming the subsequent specific effect and executing a new specific effect according to the type of the specific state (the length of the transition period to the specific state).

Feature I6. When the predetermined condition is met, the number of remaining games until the second end condition is met is increased,
The continuation determination means determines that, when the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect, and the specific effect is executed in response to the second end condition, the specific effect being executed A second determination means for determining whether to stop or suspend (a function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5104 by the display control device 81 according to the seventh embodiment),
Remaining game number grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games until the first end condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied (executing the processing of step S5101 by the display control device 81 according to the seventh embodiment) function),
Characteristic features I1 through I1, wherein the second determination means determines whether or not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed by referring to the number of remaining games ascertained by the remaining game number ascertaining means. The gaming machine according to any one of I5.

Even if the second termination condition is satisfied before the first termination condition is satisfied before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the satisfaction timing of the second termination condition is delayed due to the predetermined condition being satisfied. The order of the condition and the first end condition may be reversed, and the state may change such that the first end condition is met before the second end condition is met. In this configuration, in order to determine whether or not to stop or suspend the specific effect by referring to the number of remaining games until the first end condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific effect corresponding to the second end condition is determined. Even when a predetermined condition is established during execution of the performance, the specific performance can be continued when a reversal phenomenon occurs, etc., and the frequency of interruption of the specific performance can be reduced.

Feature I7. If the number of remaining games ascertained by the number-of-remaining-games ascertaining means is smaller than a predetermined number (a number equal to or less than the number of executed bonus games corresponding to the second BB state), the second determining means determines that the number of games being executed The gaming machine according to feature I6, characterized in that it is determined not to stop or interrupt the specific effect (step S5102).

According to the above configuration, if the number of remaining games until the first end condition is satisfied is within a certain range when the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect corresponding to the second end condition, the specific effect being executed may continue without cessation or interruption. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature I8. The predetermined number is the number of remaining games until the second end condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, and the number of games until the second end condition is satisfied based on the predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the number is obtained by adding an increase in the number of remaining games.

In the above configuration, when the state changes to satisfy the first end condition before the second end condition, the specific effect being executed can be stopped or continued without interruption. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature I9. Specific state transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101) for shifting to a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) over a plurality of games when the predetermined condition is established. ,
The gaming machine according to feature I7 or feature I8, wherein the predetermined number is equal to or less than an expected value of the number of games executed in the specific state or an estimated value based on results.

With the above configuration, when the reversal phenomenon occurs within the range of the specific state, that is, when the first game state ends due to reaching the upper limit number of games during the specific state, the specific effect can be continued. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the specific effect is interrupted.

Feature I10. The specifying means continues the specific effect being executed when the second determining means determines not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed (step S5104 by the display control device 81). function to execute the processing of
When the specific effect is continued based on the determination by the second determination means that the specific effect being executed is not to be stopped or interrupted, the continued specific effect is controlled according to the first end condition. The game machine according to any one of features I6 to I9, characterized in that it has means for terminating the process by the display control device 81 (function for executing the processes of steps S5201 to S5206 by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the end condition of the specific effect is changed to correspond to the first end condition. That is, since the continued specific effect is terminated according to the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games, the specific effect and the first game state can be synchronized.

Feature I11. The specifying means continues the specific effect being executed when the second determining means determines not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed (step S5104 by the display control device 81). function to execute the processing of
When the specific effect is continued based on the determination by the second determination means that the specific effect being executed is not to be stopped or interrupted, the continued specific effect corresponds to the first end condition. Any of features I6 to I10, characterized in that it comprises means for executing a predetermined notification (such as a notification suggesting or teaching the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games) that allows the player to recognize that the game is to be played. The gaming machine described in Crab.

With the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued for the reason of the reversal phenomenon, the player can recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the first end condition, so that the confusion of the player can be suitably suppressed. becomes possible.

Note that when this feature is applied to the feature I10, it is possible to match the player's recognition by the predetermined notification with the end timing of the continued specific effect, thereby more preferably suppressing the player's confusion. is expected to have the effect of enabling

Feature I12. When the specific effect is executed in response to the second end condition, a specific notification (remaining up to the upper limit increase number) that allows the player to recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second end condition an increase number or a notification that suggests or teaches the number of remaining games converted from the remaining increase number into the number of games, etc.),
The specifying means continues the specific effect being executed when the second determining means determines not to stop or interrupt the specific effect being executed (step S5104 by the display control device 81). function to execute the processing of
and means for not executing the specific notification when the specific effect is continued based on the determination by the second determination means that the specific effect being executed is not to be stopped or interrupted. A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features I6 to I11.

In the above configuration, when the specific effect is continued due to the reversal phenomenon, the specific notification that enables the player to recognize that the specific effect corresponds to the second end condition is not executed. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the continued specific effect corresponds to the second end condition, thereby suitably suppressing player confusion.

When this feature is applied to the above feature I10, even if the continued specific effect is ended according to the remaining number of games up to the upper limit number of games, it is possible to suitably suppress the confusion of the player. The effect of becoming Further, the "means for not executing the specific notification" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for not executing the specific notification during the execution of the said continued specific effect".

Feature I13. Specific state transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for shifting to a specific state (bonus game corresponding to the second BB state) over a plurality of games when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Means for executing a predetermined effect (bonus effect) corresponding to the specific state after the specific effect ends in the case where the specific effect is continued by the specifying means and the specific effect ends during the specific state ( The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I12, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S4705, S4604, and S4605 by the display control device 81.

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the specific state occurs during the execution of the specific effect and the continuation of the specific effect is given priority, the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the specific state) is executed after the specific effect ends. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the transition to the specific state is in progress.

For each configuration of the features I1 to I13, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B16, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E18, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G7, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H1 to H16 and features I1 to I13 individually, or apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. is also possible. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group I to each configuration of feature group A to feature group I detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts. When applying each of the above features to a pachinko gaming machine, it can be understood that a game (one game) relating to each feature is a variation (one variation).

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine, 32... Reel, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop switch, 65... Auxiliary display part, 81... Display control device, 101... Main control device.

Claims (1)

a plurality of variable display areas in which a pattern is variably displayed when a start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the pattern is stopped when a stop condition is satisfied;
When a specific trigger is established, the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas and the variable display of the pattern is stopped in the plurality of variable display areas. a specific effect setting means for setting the effect to be executed;
a specific effect executing means for causing the specific effect to be executed by a predetermined effect means based on the setting result of the specific effect setting means;
In a game machine equipped with
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing a first game corresponding to the establishment of the first condition when the first condition is satisfied, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second game is executed. The configuration is capable of executing the second game corresponding to the establishment of the condition,
The specific effect setting means comprises a first means for setting the specific effect to be executed when the specific opportunity is established in a situation where the game of the first condition is played,
The second condition is satisfied after the specific effect is set by the first means, and the second game corresponding to the establishment of the second condition is executed during execution of the specific effect set by the first means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second means for stopping or interrupting the specific effect being executed when the specific effect is being executed.

Images